yk-ep style b centrifugal chiller - johnson controls

Form Number: 160.87-OM1 (920)

Supersedes: 160.87-OM1 (818)

Operations and Maintenance Manual

Issue Date: 2020-09-15

YK-EP Style B Centrifugal ChillerR-134a, Cooling Only with OptiView Control Center, SolidState Starter and Variable Speed Drive

2 YK-EP Style B Centrifugal Chiller

ContentsContentsDescription of system and fundamentals of operation.......................................................................... 11

System operation description.......................................................................................................... 11Capacity control................................................................................................................................. 12

OptiView Control Center Introduction....................................................................................................... 14OptiView Control Center................................................................................................................... 16Interface conventions overview....................................................................................................... 17Navigation.......................................................................................................................................... 18Home screen...................................................................................................................................... 22System screen.................................................................................................................................... 26Economizer system screen............................................................................................................... 28Evaporator screen............................................................................................................................. 30Condenser screen.............................................................................................................................. 34Head pressure control screen.......................................................................................................... 36Refrigerant level control screen...................................................................................................... 39Primary compressor screen............................................................................................................. 42Economizer compressor screen...................................................................................................... 46Economizer operation screen.......................................................................................................... 49Economizer PRV calibration screen................................................................................................. 51Economizer screen............................................................................................................................ 53Proximity probe calibration screen................................................................................................. 55Hot gas bypass screen...................................................................................................................... 57Surge protection screen................................................................................................................... 60Variable Geometry Diffuser screen................................................................................................. 64Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints screen................................................................................ 66Economizer compressor Variable Geometry Diffuser screen...................................................... 69Economizer Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints screen.......................................................... 71Pre-Rotation Vanes calibration screen............................................................................................ 74VSD tuning screen............................................................................................................................. 76Oil sump screen................................................................................................................................. 79Economizer oil pump screen............................................................................................................ 82Economizer capacity control screen............................................................................................... 85Economizer capacity control setpoints screen.............................................................................. 88Economizer anti-surge tuning screen............................................................................................. 91Condenser refrigerant level control screen................................................................................... 93Economizer Solid State Starter screen............................................................................................ 96Electro-mechanical starter screen................................................................................................... 98Mod “A” Solid State Starter screen............................................................................................... 100Economizer Solid State Starter screen.......................................................................................... 102Medium voltage Solid State Starter screen.................................................................................. 104Variable Speed Drive (VSD) screen................................................................................................ 106

YK-EP Style B Centrifugal Chiller 3

Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (MVVSD) screen............................................................ 108Variable Speed Drive (VSD) details screen................................................................................... 111Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) details screen.......................................................................... 116Surge map screen - Table view...................................................................................................... 119Surge map screen - List view......................................................................................................... 121Harmonic filter details screen........................................................................................................ 123Motor lubrication screen................................................................................................................ 126Motor details screen....................................................................................................................... 130Motor setpoints screen................................................................................................................... 136Setpoints screen.............................................................................................................................. 140Setup screen.................................................................................................................................... 144Quick start screen........................................................................................................................... 149Schedule screen............................................................................................................................... 153User screen...................................................................................................................................... 155Comms screen................................................................................................................................. 157Printer screen.................................................................................................................................. 159Sales order screen........................................................................................................................... 161Economizer sales order screen...................................................................................................... 163Operations screen........................................................................................................................... 164History screen.................................................................................................................................. 166History details screen..................................................................................................................... 168Security log screen.......................................................................................................................... 169Security log details screen............................................................................................................. 171Custom view screen........................................................................................................................ 173Custom view setup screen............................................................................................................. 174Trend screen.................................................................................................................................... 176Trend setup screen......................................................................................................................... 178Advanced trend setup screen........................................................................................................ 181Common slots screen..................................................................................................................... 184

Display messages....................................................................................................................................... 189Status messages.............................................................................................................................. 189Safety shutdown messages........................................................................................................... 208Mod “B” SSS safety shutdown messages.................................................................................... 215

Printing........................................................................................................................................................ 220Printing overview............................................................................................................................. 220Printer connections......................................................................................................................... 222Printer setup.................................................................................................................................... 222Control center setup....................................................................................................................... 222Downloading system prints to a laptop....................................................................................... 223Printer connections......................................................................................................................... 225

Service......................................................................................................................................................... 239

YK-EP Style B Centrifugal Chiller4

OptiView control panel................................................................................................................... 239Microboard 031-03630-007............................................................................................................. 239Chiller operating program............................................................................................................. 241Program jumpers/Program switches........................................................................................... 243Keypad interface.............................................................................................................................. 247CM-2 board or Style A Solid State Starter interface.................................................................... 247Configuration/Setup....................................................................................................................... 252Downloading a program from a program card........................................................................... 258Metric conversion............................................................................................................................ 268

5YK-EP Style B Centrifugal Chiller

6 YK-EP Style B Centrifugal Chiller

General safety guidelinesThis equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. During rigging, installation, operation,maintenance, or service, individuals may be exposed to certain components or conditions including,but not limited to: heavy objects, refrigerants, materials under pressure, rotating components, andboth high and low voltage. Each of these items has the potential, if misused or handled improperly,to cause bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and responsibility of rigging, installation, andoperating/service personnel to identify and recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves,and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure to comply with any of these requirements couldresult in serious damage to the equipment and the property in which it is situated, as well as severepersonal injury or death to themselves and people at the site.This document is intended for use by owner-authorized rigging, installation, and operating/servicepersonnel. It is expected that these individuals possess independent training that will enable themto perform their assigned tasks properly and safely. It is essential that, prior to performing anytask on this equipment, this individual shall have read and understood the on-product labels, thisdocument and any referenced materials. This individual shall also be familiar with and complywith all applicable industry and governmental standards and regulations pertaining to the task inquestion.

Safety symbolsThe following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to specific situations:

DANGER

Indicates a possible hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if proper care is nottaken.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which will result in possible injuries or damage to equipmentif proper care is not taken.

CAUTION

Identifies a hazard which could lead to damage to the machine, damage to other equipment and/orenvironmental pollution if proper care is not taken or instructions and are not followed.

Note: Highlights additional information useful to the technician in completing the work beingperformed properly.


WARNING

External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product line, is not tobe connected inside the OptiView cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers and controlsand any external wiring must not be installed inside the micro panel. All wiring must be in accordancewith Johnson Controls’ published specifications and must be performed only by a qualified electrician.Johnson Controls will NOT be responsible for damage/problems resulting from improper connectionsto the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warning will void themanufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.

Changeability of this documentIn complying with Johnson Controls’ policy for continuous product improvement, the informationcontained in this document is subject to change without notice. Johnson Controls makesno commitment to update or provide current information automatically to the manual orproduct owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can be obtained by contacting the nearestJohnson Controls Service office or accessing the Johnson Controls QuickLIT website at http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com.It is the responsibility of rigging, lifting, and operating/ service personnel to verify the applicabilityof these documents to the equipment. If there is any question regarding the applicability of thesedocuments, rigging, lifting, and operating/service personnel should verify whether the equipmenthas been modified and if current literature is available from the owner of the equipment prior toperforming any work on the chiller.

Revision NotesRevisions made to this document are indicated in the following table. These revisions are totechnical information, and any other changes in spelling, grammar, or formatting are not included.

Affected pages Description9 Conditioned Based Maintenance program information added

Associated literatureDescription Form numberYK-EP Installation Checklist and Request for Startup Engineer 160.87-CL1YK-EP Startup Checklist 160.87-CL2YK-EP Maintenance Log Sheet 160.87-MR1YK-EP Installation and Reassembly 160.87-N1YK-EP Operation Manual 160.87-OM1Wiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers with OptiView Control Center WaterPump Starters 160.87-PW1

Wiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers with OptiView Control Center FieldControl Modifications 160.87-PW2

Wiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers with OptiView Control Center andElectro-Mechanical Starter 160.87-PW4

Wiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers with OptiView Control Center andModbus SSS/VSD 160.87-PW5


http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com

http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.87-CL1


https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.87-MR1

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.87-N1

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.87-OM1

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.87-PW1




Description Form numberWiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers Field Connections for MVVSD 160.87-PW8Wiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers with OptiView Control Center and MotorMonitoring 160.87-PW11

Wiring Diagram - YK-EP Style B Chillers with OptiView Control Center and MotorSpace Heater 160.87-PW12

Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter - Operation 160.00-O2Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (2300v - 6600v) - Operation 160.00-O6Unit Mounted Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (2300v - 4160v) - Operation 160.00-O7Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (10,000v - 13,800v) - Operation 160.00-O8Solid State Starter (Mod A) - Operation and Maintenance 160.46-OM3.1Long-Term Storage Requirements - General 50.20-NM1Long-Term Storage Requirements - Field Preparation 50.20-NM5Long-Term Storage - Periodic Checklist and Logs 50.20-CL5

Conditioned based maintenanceTraditional chiller maintenance is based upon assumed and generalized conditions. In lieu ofthe traditional maintenance program, a Johnson Controls YORK Conditioned Based Maintenance(CBM) program can be substituted. This CBM service plan is built around the specific needs forthe chiller, operating conditions, and annualized impact realized by the chiller. Your local JohnsonControls Branch can propose a customized Planned Service Agreement that leverages real timeand historical data, delivering performance reporting, corrective actions required and data enabledguidance for optimal operation and lifecycle assurance. The program will include fault detectiondiagnostics, operation code statistics, performance based algorithms and advance rules basedrationale delivered by the Johnson Controls Connected Equipment Portal.





https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.00-O2




https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=160.46-OM3.1

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=50.20-NM1

https://docs.johnsoncontrols.com/chillers/access/sources/ud/document?docnumber=50.20-NM5


NomenclatureFigure 1: Nomenclature

LD30071

ECONOMIZERCOMPRESSORCODE

UNIT TYPE YORK YK-EP Efficiency Plus

YKEP BD DL - EF B-BD K7 Q3 S

PRIMARY COMPRESSOR CODE

PRIMARYPOWERSUPPLY - = 60 Hz5 = 50 HzM = Incoming line frequency in 50 Hz and motor frequency in 60 Hz

ECONOMIZERPOWERSUPPLY- = 60 Hz5 = 50 Hz

DESIGN LEVEL

SPECIALFEATURES

ECONOMIZERMOTOR CODE60 Hz 50 Hz EF 5ECEG 5EDEH 5EEEJ 5EFEK 5EGEL 5EHEM 5EIEN 5EJEP 5EKER 5ELES 5EMET 5EN 5EO

PRIMARYMOTOR CODE60 Hz 50 Hz DD 5DDDE 5DEDF 5DF- 5DGDH 5DHDJ 5DJDK 5DKDL 5DL

CONDENSER CODE

BB CJ BC CKBD CLB5 C6B6 C7B7 C8B8 C9

EVAPORATOR CODE

BB CJ BC CKBD CLB5 C6B6 C7B7 C8B8 C9


Description of system and fundamentals ofoperationSystem operation descriptionThe YORK Model YK-EP Chiller is commonly applied to large air conditioning systems, but maybe used on other applications. The chiller consists of an two open motors, each mounted to acompressor (with integral speed increasing gears), condenser, evaporator and variable flowcontrol.The chiller is controlled by a modern state of the art Microcomputer Control Center that monitorsits operation. The Control Center is programmed by the operator to suit job specifications.Automatic timed start-ups and shutdowns are also programmable to suit nighttime, weekends,and holidays. The operating status, temperatures, pressures, and other information pertinent tooperation of the chiller are automatically displayed and read on a graphic display. Other displayscan be observed by pressing the keys as labeled on the Control Center. The chiller with theOptiView Control Center is applied with an Electro-Mechanical Starter, YORK Solid State Starter(optional), or Variable Speed Drive (optional). The economizer compressor motor is controlled by asolid-state starter exclusively.When the compressor motor is driven by a YORK Solid State Starter, one of three different starterscould be applied. Chillers are equipped with either the Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter(LCSSS), the Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (MVSSS) or Remote Mounted Medium Voltage SolidState Starter (MVSSS).

Figure 2: Model YK-EP chiller


Figure 3: Compressor pre-rotation vanes

When the compressor motor is driven by a YORK Variable Speed Drive, there could be a VariableSpeed Drive (VSD) or a Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (MVVSD) applied.In operation, a liquid (water or brine to be chilled) flows through the cooler, where boilingrefrigerant absorbs heat from the liquid. The chilled liquid is then piped to fan coil units or other airconditioning terminal units, where it flows through finned coils, absorbing heat from the air. Thewarmed liquid is then returned to the chiller to complete the chilled liquid circuit.The refrigerant vapor, which is produced by the boiling action in the cooler, flows to thecompressor where the rotating impeller increases its pressure and temperature and discharges itinto the condenser. Water flowing through the condenser tubes absorbs heat from the refrigerantvapor, causing it to condense. The condenser water is supplied to the chiller from an externalsource, usually a cooling tower. The condensed refrigerant drains from the condenser into theliquid return line, where the variable orifice meters the flow of liquid refrigerant to the cooler tocomplete the refrigerant circuit.The major components of a chiller are selected to handle the refrigerant, which would beevaporated at full load design conditions. However, most systems will be called upon to deliver fullload capacity for only a relatively small part of the time the unit is in operation.

Capacity controlThe major components of a chiller are selected for full load capacities, therefore capacity must becontrolled to maintain a constant chilled liquid temperature leaving the cooler. Pre-Rotation Vanes(PRV), located at the entrance to the compressor impeller, compensate for variation in load (Referto Figure 3).The position of these vanes is automatically controlled through a lever arm attached to an electricmotor located outside the compressor housing. The automatic adjustment of the vane position ineffect provides the performance of many different compressors to match various load conditionsfrom full load with vanes wide open to minimum load with vanes completely closed.


Refrigerant flow-through chiller

Figure 4: Refrigerant flow-through cross section diagram

Table 1: LegendCallout DescriptionA High pressure vaporB High pressure liquid refrigerantC Low pressure vaporD Low pressure liquid refrigerantE Intermediate pressure vaporF Intermediate pressure liquid refrigerant


OptiView Control Center IntroductionThe OptiView Control Center is a microprocessor based control system for R134a centrifugalchillers. It controls the leaving chilled liquid temperature via Pre-Rotation Vane controls and hasthe ability to limit motor current via control of the Pre-Rotation Vanes. It is compatible with YORKSolid State Starter (optional), Variable Speed Drive (optional), and Electro-Mechanical Starterapplications.The panel comes configured with a full screen LCD Graphic Display mounted in the middle of akeypad interface. The graphic display allows the presentation of several operating parametersat once. In addition, the operator may view a graphical representation of the historical operationof the chiller as well as the present operation. For the novice user, the locations of various chillerparameters are clearly and intuitively marked. Instructions for specific operations are provided onmany of the screens.The graphic display also allows information to be represented in both English (temperatures in °Fand pressures in PSIG) and Metric (temperatures in °C and pressures in kPa) mode. The advantagesare most apparent, however, in the ability to display many languages.The Control Center continually monitors the system operation and records the cause of anyshutdowns (Safety, Cycling or Normal). This information is recorded in memory and is preservedeven through a power failure condition. The user may recall it for viewing at any time. Duringoperation, the user is continually advised of the operating conditions by various status and warningmessages. In addition, it may be configured to notify the user of certain conditions via alarms. Acomplete listing of shutdown, status, and warning messages is detailed in Display messages.There are certain screens, displayed values, programmable setpoints and manual control shownin this manual that are for Service Technician use only. They are only displayed when logged inat SERVICE access level or higher. The setpoints and parameters displayed on these screens areexplained in the OptiView Control Center Service Manual.

Note: These parameters affect chiller operation and should never be modified by anyoneother than a qualified Service Technician. They are shown in this manual for reference only.

Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting information for Service Technicians are included inOptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). Also included in the service manualare detailed descriptions of chiller features, such as the Refrigerant Level Control, Variable SpeedDrive Oil Pump, Hot Gas Bypass, High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity Probe, Remote Setpoints,Smart Freeze Protection, and Standby Lubrication.The Control Center expands the capabilities of remote control and communications. By providinga common networking protocol through the Building Automation System (BAS), YORK Chillers notonly work well individually, but also as a team. This new protocol allows increased remote control ofthe chiller, as well as 24-hour performance monitoring via a remote site. In addition, compatibilityis maintained with the present network of BAS communications. The chiller also maintains thestandard digital remote capabilities as well. Both of these remote control capabilities allow for thestandard Energy Management System (EMS) interface:

1. Remote Start2. Remote Stop3. Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint adjustment (0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to

20mA or 4 to 20mA) or Pulse Width Modulation4. Remote Current Limit Setpoint adjustment (0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA)

or Pulse Width Modulation5. Remote READY TO START Contacts6. Safety Shutdown Contacts


7. Cycling Shutdown Contacts

The chiller operating program resides in the OptiView Control Center Microboard. The ControlCenter could be equipped with the following Microboards:

• 031-02430-001 – Shipped in new production chillers after June 2006. This is an upgradedversion of the 031-02430 microboard. The upgrade is necessary to operate with the MediumVoltage Solid State Starter, Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive and those Variable SpeedDrives and Style B Solid State Starters that serially communicate with the microboard usingModbus Protocol.

The upgrade includes a larger BRAM (U38) and an additional RS-485 port on COM2 serial port forModbus communications.Software version (D.Exx.01.xx.yzz) are alphanumeric codes that represent the application, languagepackage and revision levels per below. Each time the controls portion or language section isrevised, the respective revision level increments.

• D – Industrial chiller• Exx – Used on Microboard 031-02430-001• 01 – YKEP chiller• xx – controls revision level (00, 01, etc)• y – language package (0 equals English only, 1 equals NEMA, 2 equals CE, 3 equals NEMA/CE )• zz – language package revision level (00, 01, etc)• 031-03630-001 – Shipped in new production chillers after August 2016. This is an upgraded

microboard that operates with the Electro-Mechanical, Medium Voltage Solid State Starter,Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive and those Variable Speed Drives and Style B Solid StateStarters that serially communicate with the microboard using the Modbus Protocol.

Software version (Z.OPT.01.xx.yzz) are alphanumeric codes that represent the application, languagepackage and revision levels per below. Each time the controls portion or language section isrevised, the respective revision level increments.

• Z – Industrial chiller• OPT – Used on Microboard 031-03630-001• 01 – YKEP chiller• xx – controls revision level (00, 01, etc)• y – language package (0 equals English only, 1 equals NEMA, 2 equals CE, 3 equals NEMA/CE )• zz – language package revision level (00, 01, etc)


OptiView Control Center

Figure 5: OptiView Control Center

The OptiView™ Control Center display is highlighted by a full screen graphics display. This displayis nested within a standard keypad, and is surrounded by SOFT keys which are redefined basedon the currently displayed screen. Eight buttons are available on the right side of the panel, andare primarily used for navigation between the system screens. At the base of the display are 5additional buttons. The area to the right of the keypad is used for data entry with a standardnumeric keypad provided for entry of system setpoints and limits.Table 2: Keypad legend

The DECIMAL key provides accurate entry ofsetpoint values.

A ± key has also been provided to allow entryof negative values and AM/PM selection duringtime entry.In order to accept changes made to the chillersetpoints, the CHECK key is provided as auniversal ‘Enter’ key or ‘Accept’’ symbol.In order to reject entry of a setpoint or dismissan entry form, the ‘X’ key is provided as auniversal ‘Cancel’ symbol.Cursor Arrow keys are provided to allowmovement on screens which contain a largeamount of entry data. In addition, these keyscan be used to scroll through history and eventlogs.


The Start/Stop control is operated via a soft Start/Stop key on the Home screen. Refer to OptiViewControl Center Introduction for details.

Interface conventions overviewThe new graphical display on each control panel allows a wide variety of information to bepresented to the user. Each screen description in this document describes the graphical elementson the screen and gives a short summary of the functions available. Each element on the screen willthen be categorized into three distinct groups: Display Only, Programmable, and Navigation. Belowis a short description of what types of information are included in these groups.The programmable values and navigation commands are also subject to access level restrictions asdescribed below. For each of these elements, an indication is given to show the minimum accesslevel required to program the value or navigate to the subscreen.

Display onlyValues in this group are read-only parameters of information about the chiller operation. Thistype of information may be represented by a numerical value, a text string, or an LED image. Fornumerical values, if the monitored parameter is above the normal operating range, the high limitvalue will be displayed along with the ‘>’ symbol; if it is below the normal operating range, the lowlimit value will be displayed along with the ‘<’ symbol. In some cases, the value may be renderedinvalid by other conditions and the display will use X’s to indicate this.

ProgrammableValues in this group are available for change by the user. In order to program any setpointson the system, the user must first be logged in with the appropriate access level. Each of theprogrammable values requires a specific access level which will be indicated beside the specifiedvalue. All of the programmable controls in the system fall into one of the categories describedbelow:

Access levelIn order to program any setpoints on the system, the user must first login with an appropriateaccess level. When power is applied to the chiller, the system begins with an access level of VIEW.This will allow the user to navigate to most screens and observe the values displayed there.However, the user will not be allowed to change any values. To change any values, the user mustreturn to the HOME Screen (shown by default when power is applied to the system), and use theLOGIN button or utilize the CHANGE SETPOINTS key described below. At this point, the user will beprompted to enter a User ID and the corresponding password. By default, the User ID is zero (0). Inorder to gain standard OPERATOR level access, the password would be entered as 9 6 7 5, using thenumeric keypad. OPERATOR access reverts to the VIEW level after 10 continuous minutes without akeypress. If a custom User ID and password have been defined (refer to User screen), the user mayenter that User ID and the corresponding password value.If the correct password is received, the user is authorized with the appropriate access level. If anincorrect password is entered, the user is notified of the failure and prompted again. At this pointthe user may retry the password entry, or cancel the login attempt.

Change setpointsOn screens containing setpoints programmable at the OPERATOR access level, a key with thislabel will be visible if the present access level is VIEW. This key brings up the access level promptdescribed above. It allows the user to login at a higher access level without returning to the HOMEScreen. After login, the user may then modify setpoints on that screen.

SetpointsThe Control Center uses the setpoint values to control the chiller and other devices connected tothe chiller system. Setpoints can fall into several categories. They could be numeric values (such


as 45.0°F for the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature), or they could enable or disable a feature orfunction.Regardless of which setpoint is being programmed, the following procedure applies:

1. Press the desired setpoint key. A dialog box appears displaying the present value, the upperand lower limits of the programmable range, and the default value.

2. If the dialog box begins with the word ENTER, use the numeric keys to enter the desiredvalue. Leading zeroes are not necessary. If a decimal point is necessary, press the ‘•’ key (i.e.45.0).Pressing the ▲ key, sets the entry value to the default for that setpoint. Pressing the ▼ key,clears the present entry. The ◄ key is a backspace key and causes the entry point to moveback one space.If the dialog box begins with SELECT, use the ◄ and ► keys to select the desired value.If the previously defined setpoint is desired, press the ‘X’ (Cancel) key to dismiss the dialogbox.

3. Press the Enter key.4. If the value is within range, it is accepted and the dialog box disappears. The chiller will

begin to operate based on the new programmed value. If out of range, the value will not beaccepted and the user is prompted to try again.

Manual controlsSome keys are used to perform manual control functions. These may involve manual control ofitems such as the Pre-Rotation Vanes, variable orifice or oil pump speed. Other keys in this categoryare used to initiate/terminate processes such as calibrations or reports.

Free cursorOn screens containing many setpoints, a specific SOFT key may not be assigned to each setpointvalue. A SOFT key will be assigned to enable the cursor arrow keys below the numeric keypad whichare used to HIGHLIGHT the desired setpoint field. At this point, the Enter key is pressed to bring upa dialog prompting the user to enter a new setpoint value. The (X) key cancels cursor mode. (Referto Schedule screen for an example.)

NavigationIn order to maximize the amount of values which the panel can display to the user, and in orderto place those values in context, multiple screens have been designed to describe the chilleroperation. In order to move from one screen to the next, navigation keys have been defined.These keys allow the user to either move FORWARD to a subscreen of the present screen, or moveBACKWARD to the previous screen. Except for the HOME Screen display, the upper-right SOFT keywill always return the user to the HOME Screen. Navigating with SOFT keys is as simple as pressingthe key next to the label containing the name of the desired screen. The system will immediatelyrefresh the display with the graphics for that screen. This list shows a layout of all the screens andhow they are connected from the Home screen.

• System screen

- Economizer screen

• Evaporator screen• Condenser screen

- Refrigerant level control screen


- Head pressure control screen

• Primary condenser screen

- Proximity probe calibration screen- Hot gas bypass screen- Surge protection screen- Variable Geometry Diffuser screen- Pre-Rotation Vanes calibration screen- VSD tuning screen

• Oil sump screen• Motor

- Electro-mechanical starter (EMS) screen- Mod "A" Solid State Starter (SSS) screen- Medium Voltage Solid State Starter MV SSS) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive

interface (MV VSD)- Variable Speed Drive (VSD) screen

- VSD details screen- Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) details screen- Surge map screen - Table screen- Harmonic filter details screen

- Motor lubrication screen- Motor details screen- Motor setpoints screen

• Setpoints screen

- Setup screen

- Schedule screen- User screen- Comms screen- Printer screen- Sales order screen- Operations screen- Diagnostics (refer to the OptiView Control Center Service Manual)

- Quick start screen

• History screen

- History details screen- Security log screen

- Security log details screen


- Custom view screen

- Custom view setup screen

- Trend screen

- Trend setup screen- Advanced trend setup screen- Common slots screen


LanguagesThe Screens can be displayed in various languages. Language selection is done on the USER Screen.The desired language is selected from those available. Not all languages are available. English isthe default language. If a language other than English is being displayed, an English-only speakingperson should navigate to the USER Screen using the preceding navigation chart and select Englishper the USER Screen instructions in this manual.

Analog input rangesThe following table indicates the valid display range for each of the analog input values. In theevent that the input sensor is reading a value outside of these ranges, the < or > symbols will bedisplayed beside the minimum or maximum value, respectively.Table 3: Analog input ranges

English range Metric rangeAnalog input

Low High Units Low High UnitsLeaving chilled liquid temperature 0.0 82.0 °F -17.7 27.7 °CReturn chilled liquid temperature 0.0 94.1 °F -17.7 34.5 °CLeaving condenser liquid temperature 8.0 133.5 °F -13.3 56.3 °CReturn condenser liquid temperature 8.0 133.5 °F -13.3 56.3 °CEvaporator refrigerant temperature(optional) 0.0 126.1 °F -17.7 52.3 °C

Discharge temperature 31.8 226.3 °F -0.1 107.9 °COil temperature 31.8 226.3 °F -0.1 107.9 °CCondenser pressure 0.0 315.0 PSIG 0.0 2172.4 KPAGCondenser temperature -98.7 160.1 °F -72.6 71.7 °CEvaporator pressure 5.5 77.4 PSIG 37.9 533.7 KPAGEvaporator temperature -44.9 64.7 °F -42.7 18.1 °COil pump pressure 0.0 315.0 PSIG 0.0 2172.4 KPAGHigh speed thrust bearing proximityposition (Style E and earlier chillers with G,H, or J compressors and Style F and laterchillers with J or H3 compressors)

8.0 99.0 Mils -7.1 148.8 °C

Refrigerant level 0.0 100.0 % 0.0 100.0 %Drop leg refrigerant temperature 0.0 121.7 °F -17.7 49.8 °CMotor winding temperature – RTD (PhaseA, B, C) 32.0 399.5 °F 0.0 204.2 °C

Motor winding temperature – 50K Ohmtransmitter (Phase A, B, C) 31.2 412.5 °F -0.5 211.4 °C

Motor bearing temperature – RTD (shaftend and opposite end) 32.0 399.5 °F 0.0 204.2 °C

Motor bearing vibration – accelerometer(shaft end and opposite end) 0.0 30.0 _ _ _ _

Note: Saturation temperatures are calculated values. They will display XXX if the pressure usedfor the calculation is out of range.


Home screen

Figure 6: Home screen

When the chiller system is powered on, the above default display appears. The primary valueswhich must be monitored and controlled are shown on this screen. The HOME Screen displaydepicts a visual representation of the chiller itself. Animation indicates chilled liquid flow.Table 4: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionChilled Liquid Temperature– Leaving Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the evaporator.

Chilled Liquid Temperature– Entering Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the evaporator.

Condenser LiquidTemperature – Leaving Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the condenser.

Condenser LiquidTemperature –Entering Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the condenser.

Primary Motor % Full LoadAmps

This displays the percentage of Full Load Amps utilized by theprimary motor.

Primary Motor OperatingHours Displays the cumulative operating hours of the primary motor.

Primary Motor Run (LED) Is ON when the digital output controlling the motor starter contactfor the primary motor is on.

Economizer Motor % FullLoad Amps

This displays the percentage of Full Load Amps utilized by theeconomizer motor.


Table 4: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionEconomizer Motor InputPower Displays the Input Power kW of the economizer motor.

Economizer MotorOperating Hours Displays the cumulative operating hours of the economizer motor.

Economizer Motor Run(LED)

Is ON when the digital output controlling the motor starter contactfor the economizer motor is on.

Note: For fields requiring access level of SERVICE. Qualified service technicians should referto the OptiView Control Center Service for operation instructions and explanations of allprogrammable setpoints and displayed values.

Table 5: ProgrammableButton Access level Description

Login View

The OptiView Panel restricts certain operations based on passwordentry by the operator. Three different access levels are providedas follows: VIEW: The panel defaults to the lowest access levelwhich is termed VIEW. In this mode, the chiller operating valuesand setpoints can be observed, but no changes can be made.OPERATOR: The second access level is termed OPERATOR andwill allow the customer to change all of the setpoints required tooperate the chiller system. The OPERATOR access level reverts to theVIEW level after 10 continuous minutes without a keypress. SERVICE:In the event that advanced diagnostics are necessary, a SERVICEaccess level has been provided. Only qualified service personnelutilize this access level. This level provides advanced control overmany of the chiller functions and allows calibration of many of thechiller controls. The access levels are listed above in hierarchicalorder beginning with the lowest level and proceeding to the highestlevel. Users logged in under higher access levels may perform anyactions permitted by lower access levels.

The OPERATOR access level is accompanied by a 10-minute timeout.After ten (10) successive minutes without a keypress, the panelwill revert to the VIEW access level. This prevents unauthorizedchanges to the chiller if a user was logged in at a higher access leveland failed to logout. Proper procedure requires that after makingnecessary setpoint adjustments the user return to the HOME Screenand logout.

Logout Operator This key is displayed when a user is logged in at any level other thanVIEW. Pressing it will return the access level to VIEW.

Print View

Use this key to generate a hard-copy report of the present systemstatus. This provides a snapshot of the primary operating conditionsat the time the key is pressed. The History page provides enhancedreporting capability. (Refer to History screen.) This option will notbe present if the chiller is presently configured to log any incomingAdaptive Capacity Control map points. (Refer to Adaptive CapacityControl (ACC) details screen .)



Clear Fault Service

When any safety conditions have been detected and the chiller hasbeen shutdown, the main status display of the chiller will continueto display a message indicating the cause of the shutdown. Usingthis key, the message can be cleared once the Safety condition hasbeen removed.

WarningReset Operator Use of this key acknowledges a warning condition and resets the

message display associated with it.

Start/StopSoft Key Operator

This key will initially be displayed as Start and when pressed, allowsthe operator to Start the chiller. If the chiller is in Local mode itwill start immediately. If the chiller is in Remote mode then it willstart once the Start key is pressed and the remote mode calls fora start. Once started, the soft key changes to Stop and if pressed,will initiate a Soft Stop. A Soft Stop fully closes the Pre-RotationVanes prior to shutting down the compressor. This reduces bearingwear by eliminating compressor backspin at shutdown. While thevanes are closing, "Vanes Closing Before Shutdown" is displayedon the System Status Line. When the Vane Motor Switch (VMS)closes, indicating the vanes have fully closed (or 3.5 minuteshave elapsed, whichever occurs first), the Run signal is removedfrom the compressor motor starter and a System Coastdown isperformed. While the vanes are closing, if a Safety Stop is initiatedwith the Safety Stop Switch or any fault other than Leaving ChilledLiquid Temp – Low Temperature, Remote Stop, Multi-Unit Cycling –Contacts Open, System Cycling – Contacts Open Or Control Panel –Schedule occur, it will immediately enter System Coastdown.

Table 6: NavigationButton DescriptionSystem Used to provide additional system information.

Evaporator A detailed view of all evaporator parameters, including the programmableLeaving Chilled Liquid Setpoints.

Condenser A detailed view of all condenser parameters, including control of the liquidlevel functions.

CompressorA detailed view of all the compressor parameters. This includes Pre-RotationVane control, Hot Gas Bypass Control, Proximity Probe Calibration, and PRVCalibration.

Oil SumpA detailed view of all the oil pump and oil sump parameters. This includes theVariable Speed Oil Pump when installed. It also controls the Seal Lubricationfunctionality.


Table 6: NavigationButton Description

Motor

A detailed view of the motor controller parameters, specific to the controllertype presently utilized on the chiller system. This allows programming of thecurrent limit and the pulldown demand limit values. For a VSD system, theAdaptive Capacity Control and Harmonic Filter information is controlled underthis screen.

SetpointsThis screen provides a single location to program the most common systemsetpoints. It is also the gateway to many of the general system setupparameters such as Date/Time, Display Units, Scheduling, Printer Setup, etc.

History

This screen provides access to a snapshot of system data at each of the last 10shutdown conditions.


System screen

Figure 7: System screen

This screen gives a general overview of common chiller parameters for both shells.Table 7: Display only fieldsField/LED name Description

Discharge Temperature Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in its gaseous state atdischarge of the compressor as it travels to the condenser.

% Full Load Amps Displays the percentage of full load amps being used by the chiller.Current Limit Setpoint Displays the current limit setpoint in percentage.Chilled Liquid Temperature -Leaving Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the evaporator.

Chilled Liquid Temperature -Entering Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the evaporator.

Chilled Liquid Temperature -Setpoint

Displays the active temperature setpoint to which the chiller iscontrolling the evaporator liquid. This value could come from a 0 to20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in Analog Remotemode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gateway interfacein ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.

Evaporator Pressure Displays the present refrigerant pressure in the evaporator.Evaporator SaturationTemperature Displays the present saturation temperature in the evaporator.

Condenser LiquidTemperature - Leaving Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the condenser.

Condenser LiquidTemperature - Entering Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the condenser.


Table 7: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionCondenser Pressure Displays the refrigerant pressure in the condenser.Condenser SaturationTemperature Displays the saturation temperature in the condenser.

Oil Sump Temperature Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.

Oil Pressure

Displays the pressure differential between the high side oilpressure transducer (output of oil filter) and the low side oilpressure transducer (compressor housing). The displayed valueincludes offset pressure derived from auto-zeroing during theSystem Prelube. If either of the transducers used to calculate thisdifferential is out of range, the display field will show XX.X.

Table 8: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionNone – –

Table 9: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerSystem View Navigates to a screen displaying the Economizer System

parameters.


Economizer system screen

Figure 8: Economizer system screen

This screen displays all parameters related to the Economizer feature.The YK-EP Economizer feature is an optional feature and if so equipped, it must be enabled on theSETUP Screen. Once enabled, this screen is accessible from the System Screen.Table 10: Display only fieldsField/LED name Description

Discharge TemperatureDisplays the temperature of the refrigerant vapor at the dischargeof the Primary Compressor before the refrigerant enters thecondenser.

Primary % Full Load Amps Displays the percentage of full load amps (FLA) utilized by theprimary motor.

Primary Current Limit Displays the primary active motor current limit in percentage of FullLoad Amps.

Primary PRV Position Displays how open the PRV vanes are in percentage from 100% (fullyopen) to 0% (fully closed).

Primary Motor Run (LED) Illuminates when the Primary Compressor is currently running.Oil Sump Temperature Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.

Primary Oil Pressure

Display indicates the pressure differential between the high sideoil pressure transducer (primary compressor) and the low side oilpressure transducer (oil sump). The displayed value includes offsetpressure derived from auto-zeroing during the system prelube.

Economizer Motor Run(LED) Illuminates when the Economizer Compressor is currently running.


Table 10: Display only fieldsField/LED name Description

Economizer DischargeTemperature

Displays the temperature of the refrigerant vapor at the dischargeof the Economizer Compressor before the refrigerant enters thecondenser.

Economizer % Full LoadAmps

Displays the percentage of full load amps (FLA) utilized by theEconomizer Motor.

Economizer Current Limit Displays the Economizer active motor current limit in percentage atFull Load Amps.

Economizer PRV Position Displays how open the PRV vanes are in percentage from 100%(open) to 0% (closed).

Economizer Pressure Displays the pressure within the Economizer.

Economizer Saturation Displays the saturation temperature within the Economizercalculated from the Economizer Pressure.

Economizer Setpoint Displays the Level setpoint as set in the Economizer screen.Economizer Level Displays the refrigerant level in the Economizer.Oil Sump Temperature Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.Leaving Condenser LiquidTemperature

Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the condensertube bundle.

Entering Condenser LiquidTemperature Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the condenser.

Condenser Pressure Displays the pressure of the refrigerant within the condenser.Condenser SaturationTemperature

Displays the saturation temperature of the refrigerant within theCondenser calculated from the Condenser Pressure.

Condenser Drop Leg Displays the subcooled temperature at the condenser.Condenser Level Displays the refrigerant level within the condenser.Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature

Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the condensertube bundle.

Entering Chilled LiquidTemperature Displays the entering chilled liquid temperature at the evaporator.

Chilled Liquid Setpoint Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint which is set eitherlocally on the Setpoint Screen or remotely from a BAS.

Evaporator Pressure Displays the evaporator pressure.Evaporator SaturationTemperature

Shows the saturation temperature of the Evaporator calculated formthe Evaporator Pressure.

Table 11: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionNone – –

Table 12: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.System Service Returns user to SYSTEM Screen.


Evaporator screen

Figure 9: Evaporator screen

Table 13: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionChilled Liquid Flow Switch(Open / Closed) Displays whether the liquid flow is present in the evaporator.

Chilled Liquid Pump Displays the command presently sent by the Control Center to theChilled Liquid Pump (RUN or STOP).

Evaporator Pressure Displays the present refrigerant pressure in the evaporator.Evaporator SaturationTemperature Displays the present saturation temperature in the evaporator.

Return Chilled LiquidTemperature Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the evaporator.

Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the evaporator.

Evaporator RefrigerantTemperature

Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in the evaporator, if thesensor is present.

Evaporator SmallTemperature Difference

Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled Liquidtemperature and the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature. TheEvaporator Refrigerant Temperature will be represented by theRefrigerant Temperature sensor input if the sensor is present,otherwise it will be represented by the Evaporator SaturationTemperature.


Table 13: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionLeaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoints –Setpoint

Displays the present setpoint to which the chiller is operating,whether controlled locally or remotely.

Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoints –Shutdown

Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chillerwill shutdown on Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low Temperature. Thistemperature is entered as an offset with the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Cycling Offset – Shutdown Setpoint below. Althoughthe offset setpoint is changed manually, the offset being usedcan change automatically to prevent the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature from going below the minimum allowed value: 36°F(water), 34°F (water with smart freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). Theoffset being used is displayed as Effective Offset.

Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoints –Restart

Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chillerwill restart after it has shutdown on LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID –LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown. This temperature is set as anoffset using the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Cycling Offset –Restart Setpoint, displayed as OFFSET adjacent to this value.


Smart Freeze(Off / On) Service

This value is only available if the chiller is not in Brine mode. Itallows the user to enable the Smart Freeze Point Operation whichallows the chiller to run closer to the freeze point without shuttingdown.

Brine LowEvaporatorCutout

ServiceThis value is only available in Brine mode. It allows the user tospecify the Evaporator Pressure at which a safety shutdown isinitiated.

Refrigerant(Enabled /Disabled)

ServiceWhen an Evaporator Refrigerant Sensor has been installed it mustbe enabled via this toggle before the system will utilize the new,enhanced resolution input.

Local LeavingChilled LiquidTemperature– Range

Operator

This is the range over which an analog (0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in Analog Remote mode or a digital signal(PWM) in Digital Remote mode can reset the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint above the operator programmed BASESetpoint. Programmable as 10, 20, 30 or 40°F. It is added to the BASEvalue to create a range over which the remote device can reset thesetpoint. For example, if this setpoint is programmed for 10°F andthe operator programmed value is 45°F, then the remote device canset the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint over the rangeof 45.0° to 55.0°F.



Local LeavingChilled LiquidTemperature– Setpoint

Operator

This value allows the user to define the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature that is to be maintained by the chiller. It isprogrammable over the range of 38.0°F to 70.0°F (water) or 10.0°Fto 70.0°F (brine). If Smart Freeze is enabled, the range is 36.0°F to70.0°F (water). A remote device can provide an analog signal (0to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in Analog Remotemode, or PWM signal in Digital Remote mode that changes thesetpoint by creating an offset above the operator programmedBASE Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. This offset maybe defined as 10, 20, 30, or 40°F above the BASE Setpoint (referto the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoints – Setpointdescription). Additionally, an E-Link or SC-Equip Gateway (in ISNRemote mode) can define the setpoint through a serial data stream.In this case, the incoming setpoint is not an offset that is appliedto the locally programmed BASE Setpoint value, but rather is thesetpoint value itself.

LeavingChilled LiquidTemperatureCyclingOffset –Shutdown

Operator

This value allows the user to specify the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature at which the chiller will shut down on a LEAVINGCHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown. Thisis done by defining an offset below the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint. It is programmable over a range of 1°Fto 64°F below the setpoint, to a minimum cutout of 36°F (water),34°F (water with Smart Freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). Anytimethe Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint is increased, thesetpoint is increased at a rate of 0.2°F per second to allow the chillertime to unload*.

LeavingChilled LiquidTemperatureCyclingOffset –Restart

Operator

This value allows the user to specify the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature at which the chiller will restart after a shutdown on aLEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown.This is done by defining an offset above the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint. It is programmable over a range of 0°F to70°F above the setpoint, to a maximum restart value of 80°F. Thechiller will automatically restart when this temperature is reached.This setpoint can be used to reduce chiller cycling by delaying thechiller restart until the cooling load has increased.

Note: * The offset being used is displayed as Effective Offset in the upper right area of thedisplay. Usually, the Offset used is the same as the value programmed for the ShutdownSetpoint. However, the Offset being used will automatically change based on the valuesprogrammed for the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint and the Shutdown Setpoint,to prevent the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature from going below the minimum allowedvalue: 36°F (water), 34°F (water with smart freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). For example, if theLeaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint is set to 45°F (water) and the Shutdown Setpointis set to 4°F, the Effective Offset is displayed as 4°F. If the leaving setpoint is lowered to 38°F,the Effective Offset will change to 2°F. If the leaving chilled setpoint is raised back to 45°F, theEffective Offset will revert back to the Shutdown Setpoint.


Table 15: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.


Condenser screen

Figure 10: Condenser screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller condenser. All setpoints relating to the condenserside of the chiller are maintained on this screen. Animation indicates condenser liquid flow. Thisscreen also serves as a gateway to controlling the Refrigerant Level.Table 16: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionLeaving Condenser LiquidTemperature Displays the water temperature as it leaves the condenser.

Entering Condenser LiquidTemperature Displays the water temperature as it enters the condenser.

Condenser SaturationTemperature Displays the saturation temperature in the condenser.

Condenser SmallTemperature Difference

Displays the difference between the Condenser Refrigeranttemperature and the Leaving Condenser Liquid temperature. TheCondenser Refrigerant temperature will be represented by theCondenser Saturation temperature.

Condenser Pressure Displays the refrigerant pressure in the condenser.Condenser Liquid FlowSwitch (Open/Closed)

Displays the status of the flow switch in the standard condensertube bundle.

Drop Leg RefrigerantTemperature

Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in the drop leg betweenthe condenser and evaporator shells, if the sensor is present.



Sub-Cooling Temperature

Displays the difference between the Condenser Refrigeranttemperature and the Drop Leg Refrigerant temperature. TheCondenser Refrigerant temperature will be represented by theCondenser Saturation temperature. If the Drop Leg Sensor is notpresent, this temperature is not displayed.

High Pressure Switch(Open / Closed)

Displays the present position of the high pressure switch. This willindicate whether a high pressure fault is present.

Condenser Liquid FlowSwitch Indicates whether flow is present in the condenser.

Condenser Liquid Pump(Run / Stop) Indicates whether condenser liquid pump is operating.

Condenser Refrigerant Level Displays the present position of the refrigerant level if this functionis enabled.

Active Level Setpoint Displays the setpoint to which the refrigerant level is beingcontrolled.

Level Control ValveCommand Displays the level control valve signal 0 to 100%.

Table 17: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionHighPressureWarningThreshold

Service This value allows the user to define the condenser pressure at whichthe chiller will initiate a warning.

FaultAcknowledge Service This allows clearing of the High Condenser Pressure Fault while

Shutdown (Condenser-High Pressure Stopped).


Level Control Service Moves to the subscreen allowing programming of the refrigerantliquid level control setpoints.


Head pressure control screen

Figure 11: Head pressure control screen

This screen displays all parameters related to the Head Pressure Control feature. It also allows forsetting of the setpoints applicable to this feature.If equipped with this optional feature, it must be enabled on the SETUP Screen. Once enabled, thisscreen is accessible from the CONDENSER Screen.The condenser water flow animation will show flow when the Condenser Liquid Flow Switch sensesflow is present.A complete explanation of the Head Pressure Control feature are explained in the OptiView ControlCenter Service Manual.

Note: Requires a login access level of SERVICE.

Table 19: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionEntering Condenser LiquidTemperature

Displays the temperature of the liquid as it enters the standardcondenser tube bundle.

Leaving Condenser LiquidTemperature

Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the standardcondenser tube bundle.

Head Pressure Displays the pressure difference between the condenser andevaporator (condenser minus evaporator).



Head Pressure Setpoint Displays the active Head Pressure Setpoint to which the headpressure is being controlled.

Control Valve Command

Displays the position command being sent to the Control Valve.Displayed over the range of 0.0% to 100%. The actual value of theoutput signal for a given error depends on whether the PID OUTPUTSetpoint is set to direct or reverse. If set to direct, the 0.0% outputwill be at minimum; the 100% output will be at maximum. If set toreverse, the 0.0% output will be at maximum; the 100% output willbe at minimum.

Control Valve Control Mode Displays whether the Control Valve is in automatic or manualcontrol.

Table 20: ProgrammableButton Description

Head Pressure Setpoint (15.0 to 60 PSID; default 23.0 PSID) Sets the pressure differential towhich the Control Valve will control the Head Pressure.

Minimum Position (0 to 100%; default 0%) Sets the minimum position that the valve candrive to while the chiller is running.

Shutdown Position (0 to 100%; default 0%) Sets the position that the valve will drive towhile the chiller is off.

Control Valve OutputSettings – Type

(0-10v or 4 to 20mA; default 0-10v) Sets the output signal to theControl Valve to be in the form of either 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mA.

Control Valve OutputSettings – Direction

(Direct or Reverse) Allows the output signal to the Control Valve tobe set to direct or reverse acting. When set to direct, the voltage orcurrent signal to the Control Valve is at minimum for a 0% commandand at maximum for a 100% command. When set to reverse, thevoltage or current signal to the Control Valve is at maximum for a0% command and at minimum for a 100% command.

Control Valve OutputSettings – Set

(0.0% to 100%; default 0.0%) Allows the Control Valve to be manuallyset to a position between 0.0% and 100%.

Control Valve OutputSettings – Auto Places the Control Valve in automatic control.

Change Setpoints

Use to enter the Head Pressure Control PID variables below.Pressing this key places a green box around the first changeablesetpoint. Use the up/down, left/right arrows to place the selectionbox around the desired setpoint. With the setpoint selected, pressthe ENTER key. A dialog box appears with the range of settings.Using the NUMERIC keys, enter desired value. Then, press theENTER key.



Head Pressure Control – PSets the Proportional Gain of the Head Pressure Control (0.00 to5.00; default 2.00). Use the CHANGE SETPOINTS key as describedabove to select/enter this setpoint.

Head Pressure Control – ISets the Integral Gain of the Head Pressure Control (0.00 to 5.00;default 2.00). Use the CHANGE SETPOINTS key as described above toselect/enter this setpoint.

Head Pressure Control – DSets the Derivative Gain of the Head Pressure Control (0.00 to 5.00;default 0.00). Use the CHANGE SETPOINTS key as described above toselect/enter this setpoint.

Table 21: NavigationButton DescriptionHome Returns user to HOME Screen.Condenser Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.


Refrigerant level control screen

Figure 12: Refrigerant level control screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller condenser, along with the liquid refrigerant levelsensor and the flow control valve. All setpoints relating to the liquid level control are maintained onthis screen. Through animation, the variable orifice position is displayed. In addition, the refrigerantflow control valve (variable orifice) can be manually operated.


Table 22: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionCondenser Refrigerant Level Displays the present position of the liquid level*.

Subcooler Effectiveness

The Subcooler Effectiveness is evaluated with the followingcalculation and compared to a high and low limit. (Cond Sat Temp-Drop Leg Ref Temp)/(Cond Sat Temp-Entering Cond Liq Temp). Thisvalue is typically near 0.8 at design conditions.

Level Control State Indicates one of the following states the level control routine is in:Manual, Inactive, Startup Hold, Setpoint Ramp, PID Control, Hold.

Startup Delay Remaining

The level valve is held at the starting position until 15 seconds afterstart to allow the system to stabilize. Then the valve position iscontrolled by the PID loop. This read box displays the remainingseconds until PID control.

Level Control ValveCommand

Indicates the valve command as a percentage of full open. It is onlydisplayed when the valve control method is analog.


Note: *The refrigerant level is animated in the cutaway view of the condenser. The actual levelof the refrigerant in the tank does not match the percentage displayed in the Level ControlValve Command box. The actual levels versus the displayed percentages are:

Table 23: Condenser level position

Actual level Control valvecommand %

0% to 15% 50%16% to 31% 60%32% to 47% 70%48% to 63% 80%64% to 79% 90%79% 100%

Table 24: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionLevelSetpoint Service Displays the setpoint to which the refrigerant level is being

controlled. (Adjustable 20 to 80%; default 50%).StartupPosition Service Sets the starting position of the refrigerant valve to allow the system

to match the load quicker. (Adjustable 0 to 100%; default 50%).

Startup Delay –

The amount of time the refrigerant level valve PID waits after startbefore it starts controlling the valve position. This allows the systemto stabilize before making valve position changes. (Set at 15 secondsbut is adjustable with an Admin password).

Ramp Time Admin

After the chiller has been running for the level control startup delaytime, if the refrigerant level is less than the Level Setpoint, a linearlyincreasing ramp is applied to the Level Setpoint. This ramp allowsthe level to go from the present level to the programmed LevelSetpoint over a period of time programmed as the Ramp Up Time.This setpoint can only be changed with ADMIN level access.(1 to 5minutes; default 1).

ManualIncrement Admin

This sets the percentage the refrigerant valve will manually bedriven with each press of the Open or Close buttons. (0.1 to 10%;default 1.0%).

Open –

Pressing this button will set the Condenser Level Control ValveMode to Manual, if it had been in Auto. It will increase the currentCondenser Level Control Valve Command by an amount equal to theManual Increment, with a maximum of 100.0%.

Close –

Pressing this button will set the Condenser Level Control ValveMode to Manual if it had been in Auto and will decrease the currentCondenser Level Control Valve Command by an amount equal to theManual Increment, with a minimum of 0.0%.

ChangeSetpoints Admin Provide ability to change the High Threshold, Low Threshold and

three PID gain settings.



Set Service

Pressing this button will open a dialog box where the user canmanually enter a valve command. Once a legitimate value hasbeen entered and the Enter key pressed, the Condenser LevelControl Valve Mode will be set to Manual if it had been in Auto. TheCondenser Level Control Valve Command will be set to the enteredvalue.

HighThreshold Admin Sets the high limit for the Subcooler Effectiveness Warning.

(Adjustable 0 to 100%; default 50%).LowThreshold Admin Sets the low limit for the Subcooler Effectiveness Warning.

(Adjustable 0 to 100%; default 50%).

KP Admin Sets the Proportional value of the PID control loop. (Adjustable 0.1to 15; default 1.0).

Ti Admin Sets the Integral value of the PID control loop. (Adjustable 0.1 to200; default 100).

Td Admin Sets the Derivative value of the PID control loop. (Adjustable 0.0 to200; default 0.0).

Table 25: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Condenser View Returns user to CONDENSER Screen.


Primary compressor screen

Figure 13: Primary compressor screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller compressor, revealing the impeller, and shows allconditions associated with the compressor. With the proper access level, the Pre-Rotation Vanesmay be manually controlled. Animation of the compressor impeller indicates whether the chiller ispresently in a RUN condition. This screen also serves as a gateway to subscreens for calibrating thePre-Rotation Vanes, calibrating the Proximity Probe, configuring the Hot Gas Bypass, or providingadvanced control of the Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive.


Table 26: Display only fieldsField/LEDname Access level Description

Oil SumpTemperature – Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump

DischargeTemperature – Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in its gaseous state at

discharge of the compressor as it travels to the condenser.DischargeSuperheat – Displays the discharge superheat, calculated as Discharge

Temperature – Condenser Saturation temperature.High SpeedThrustBearingProximityDifferential

–Displays the present position of the High Speed Thrust Bearing inrelation to neutral. Locations are shown in mils. Zero indicates thatthe bearing is in the normal position.



Oil Pressure –

Displays the pressure differential between the high side oil pressuretransducer (compressor bearing input) and the low side oil pressuretransducer (oil sump). The displayed value includes offset pressurederived from auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either ofthe transducers used to calculate this differential is out of range, thedisplay field will show XX.X.

The offset pressure is the pressure differential between the highoil pressure (HOP) transducer and the low oil pressure (LOP)transducer outputs during a three (3) second period beginningten (10) seconds into the System Prelube. During this time, thetransducers will be sensing the same pressure and their outputsshould indicate the same pressure. However, due to accuracytolerances in transducer design, differences can exist. Thereforeto compensate for differences between transducers and assuredifferential pressure sensing accuracy, the offset pressure issubtracted algebraically from the differential pressure. The offsetpressure calculation will not be performed if either transducer is outof range. The offset value will be taken as 0 PSI in this instance.

Oil PumpDriveCommandFrequency

–Displays the electrical frequency of the Oil Pump Drive motor. Thefrequency will go up or down to match the pump motor output tothe required oil pressure.

Vane MotorSwitch (LED) – Illuminates when the vanes are completely closed.

Oil ReturnSolenoid(LED)

– Illuminates when the solenoid is energized.

Pre-RotationVanesControlMode

Service Indicates whether the vanes are under manual or automatic control.

Pre-RotationVanes Open(LED)

Service Indicates whether the vanes are in the process of opening.

Pre-RotationVanes Close(LED)

Service Indicates whether the vanes are in the process of closing.

Full LoadAmps Service Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps

(FLA) value.



Pre-RotationVanesPosition

Service This value displays the present position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes asa percentage between 0 and 100%.

Phase A, B,C Current(Solid StateStarter Only)

Service Displays the 3-phase motor current values being read from the SolidState Starter.

Oil PumpDriveCommandFrequency(VariableSpeed OilPump Only)

– The value displays the present frequency at which the oil pump isbeing commanded to run.

Table 27: ProgrammableField/LEDname Access level Description

Pre-RotationVanes Open(Manual)

Service This key puts the vane control into manual mode and sends anOPEN command to the vanes.

Pre-RotationVanes Close(Manual)

Service This key puts the vane control into manual mode and sends a CLOSEcommand to the vanes.

Pre-RotationVanes Hold(Manual)

Service This key puts the vane control into manual mode and sends a HOLDcommand to the vanes.

Pre-RotationVanes Auto Service This key returns the vane control to automatic mode.

FaultAcknowledge – This option allows clearing of the High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit

Switch safety shutdown.

Table 28: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.ProximityProbeCalibrate

Service Moves to a subscreen that allows the calibration of the High SpeedThrust Bearing Proximity Probe.

Pre-RotationVaneCalibration

ServiceOnly available if the chiller is stopped and the system uses aVariable Speed Drive or Hot Gas Bypass control. Moves to thesubscreen allowing calibration of the Pre-Rotation Vanes.


Table 28: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionVSD Tuning(VariableSpeed DriveOnly)

Service Moves to the subscreen allowing advanced tuning of the VariableSpeed Drive.

Hot Gas Service

Moves to a subscreen that allows programming of the Hot GasBypass control setpoints and manual control of the Hot Gas Bypassvalve. Only displayed if Hot Gas Bypass feature has been enabled onthe OPERATIONS Screen.

Surge View Moves to the subscreen that allows viewing and programming ofthe Surge Protection feature.

VGD Service Moves to the subscreen that allows access to the Variable GeometryDevice.

EconomizerCompressor Service Moves to the subscreen that shows the Economizer Compressor and

its operation.


Economizer compressor screen

Figure 14: Economizer compressor screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the Economizer compressor, revealing the impeller, andshows all conditions associated with the compressor. In addition, with the proper access level,the Pre-Rotation Vanes may be manually controlled. Animation of the compressor impellerindicates whether the chiller is presently in a RUN condition. This screen also serves as a gateway tosubscreens for calibrating the Pre-Rotation Vanes, calibrating the Proximity Probe, configuring theHot Gas Bypass, or providing advanced control of the Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive.Table 29: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description


–Displays the command frequency of the Oil Pump Drive. Thefrequency will go up or down to match the pump motor output tothe required oil pressure.

DischargeTemperature – Displays the temperature of the refrigerant in its gaseous state at

discharge of the compressor as it travels to the condenser.DischargeSuperheat – Displays the discharge superheat, calculated as (Discharge

Temperature – Condenser Saturation temperature).High SpeedThrustBearing LimitSwitch LED

– Displays when the high-speed thrust bearing limit switch isactivated.

Pre-RotationVanesOpening LED

– Displays when the Economizer PRV is opening.


Table 29: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

Oil Pressure –

Displays the pressure differential between the high sideoil pressuretransducer (compressor bearing input) and the low side oil pressuretransducer (oil sump). The displayed value includes offset pressurederived from auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either ofthe transducers used to calculate this differential is out of range, thedisplay field will show XX.X.

The offset pressure is the pressure differential between the highoil pressure (HOP) transducer and the low oil pressure (LOP)transducer outputs during a three (3) second period beginningten (10) seconds into the System Prelube. During this time, thetransducers will be sensing the same pressure and their outputsshould indicate the same pressure. However, due to accuracytolerances in transducer design, differences can exist. Therefore,to compensate for differences between transducersand assuredifferential pressure sensing accuracy, the offset pressure issubtracted algebraically from the differential pressure. The offsetpressure calculation will not be performed if either transducer is outof range. The offset value will be taken as 0 PSI in this instance.

Pre-RotationVanesClosing LED

– Displays when the Economizer PRV is closing.

Vane MotorSwitch (LED) – Indicates when the vanes are completely closed.

PRV Position – This value displays the present position of the Pre-Rotation vanes asa percentage between 0 and 100%.

PRVCommand – Indicateswhat percentage the panel is commanding the Pre-

Rotation Vanes to open.Phase A, B, CCurrent – Displays the 3-phase motor current values being read from the Solid

State Starter.Full LoadAmps – Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps

(FLA) value.Motor Run(LED) – Illuminates when the Primary Compressor is currently running.

CompressorStatus Service

This value displays the economizer compressor status. The valuesare as follows:

• Stopped• Prelube• Running• Soft Shutdown• Coastdown



CompressorTime Service This value displays the economizer compressor time in use or time

remaining of the active compressor status level.EstimatedRefrigerantFlow

Service An estimation of refrigerant flow since compressor start.

Startand StopRefrigerantFlow

Service Used in the estimation of refrigerant flow.

Table 30: ProgrammableButton Access Level DescriptionPRV StrokeTime Admin Displays the amount of time required for the Pre-Rotation Vane

movement.PRV Period Admin Displays the period time for the PRV.

PRV Period Service Allows the service technician to jog the economizer compressor tocheck rotation.

Table 31: NavigationButton Access Level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Compressor Service Navigates to the COMPRESSOR Screen.Economizer Service Navigates to the ECONOMIZER Screen.VGD Service Moves to the subscreen for the VGD.CapacityControl Service Navigates to CAPACITY CONTROL Screen.

Motor Service

Moves to a subscreen that allows programming of the Hot GasBypass control setpoints and manual control of the Hot Gas Bypassvalve. Only displayed if Hot Gas Bypass feature has been enabled onthe OPERATIONS Screen.

PRV Calibrate Service Moves to the subscreen that allows calibration of the EconomizerPRV feedback potentiometer.

Operations Service Navigates to the Economizer Operation screen.


Economizer operation screen

Figure 15: Economizer operations screen

This screen shows various settings and information available to set up the economizer.Table 32: ProgrammableField/LED Access level DescriptionVGD – Displays the status of the VGD. It will show enabled or disabled.

Anti-Recycle – Displays the status for the Anti-Recycle timer. It will show enabled ordisabled.

CoastdownTime – Displays the amount of time the economizer compressor spent in

coastdown.Motor AutoLube Type – Set to P203, QLS401, Sleeve or None as appropriate.

Motor Heater – Set to Enable if a motor heater is present else Disabled.Number ofstarts. Admin Displays the number of starts that the economizer compressor has

accumulated.OperatingHours Admin Displays the number of economizer compressor operating hours.


Table 33: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome – Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerCompressor – Returns user to ECONOMIZER COMPRESSOR Screen.

ChangeSettings Service This button allows selection of the various settings.


Economizer PRV calibration screen

Figure 16: Economizer PRV calibration screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller economizer compressor, revealing the Pre-Rotation Vanes and provides the capability of calibrating the Pre-Rotation Vanes.


Table 34: DisplayField/LED name DescriptionPre-Rotation Vanes Opening(LED) Indicates the vanes are opening.

Pre-Rotation Vanes Closing(LED) Indicates the vanes are closing.

PRV Feedback Voltage Displays the feedback voltage on the PRV motor.

PRV Calibration State

Displays the state of the PRV calibration as follows:• Off• Open• Check Open• Close• Check Close• Check Span• Pass• Fail

PRV Calibration State Timer Displays the amount of time.


Table 34: DisplayField/LED name Description

Vane Motor Switch Displays the state of the Vane Motor Switch as being either open orclosed.

PRV Position Displays the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes in percent over therange of 0% (full close) to 100% (full open).

% Full Load Amps Displays the full load amps of the economizer compressor motor inpercentage.

Calibration in Progress(LED) Indicates the calibration sequence is in progress.

Note:

For fields requiring access level of SERVICE. Qualified service technicians should refer tothe OptiView Control Center Service for operation instructions and explanations of allprogrammable setpoints and displayed values.


PRV Actuator Mode Displays the Pre-Rotation Vanes actuator mode as Manual orAutomatic.

Open Pressing this button will open the Pre-Rotation Vanes.Close Pressing this button will close the Pre-Rotation Vanes.

Hold Pressing this button will hold the Pre-Rotation Vanes in a setposition.

AutoPressing this button will set the economizer Pre-Rotation Vaneactuator command to Auto. This button will be enabled only whenthe Economizer PRV Actuator Mode is not Manual.

Start Calibration

Pressing this button begins the calibration process. When theStart button is pressed, it will change to a Stop Calibration button.Pressing the Stop Calibration button will stop the calibration processand change the button back to the Start Calibration button

Table 36: Navigation

Button Access levelrequired Description

Home View Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerCompressor View Returns user to ECONOMIZER COMPRESSOR screen


Economizer screen

Figure 17: Economizer screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller economizer, revealing the economizer interior andthe economizer refrigerant level control.

Note: Requires a login access level of SERVICE to Change Setpoints but can be viewed atOperator Level.

Table 37: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionHigh Pressure Switch Displays whether the high pressure switch is open or closed.

Discharge Superheat Displays the discharge superheat of the economizer in degrees intenths.

Economizer Pressure Displays the economizer pressure of the economizer.Saturation Temperature Displays the saturation temperature in tenths of the economizer.

Refrigerant Level Displays the level of the refrigerant in the economizer inpercentage.

Level Control State

Displays the level control state as follows:ManualInactiveStartup HoldSetpoint RampPID Control

Level Control ValveCommand

Displays the state of the Level Control Valve in percent of open,where 100.0% is fully open and 0.0% is fully closed.


Table 38: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionEconomizerLevelSetpoint

Service Displays the economizer refrigerant level setpoint to tenths of apercent. (Min 20%, Max 80%, Default 70%)

EconomizerStoppedSetpoint

Service Displays the economizer refrigerant stopped level setpoint to tenthsof a percent. (Min 0%, Max 80%, Default 20%)

StartupPosition Service Indicates in tenth of a percent the Economizer Level Control Valve

Startup Position setpoint. (Min 0%, Max 100%, Default 50%)Startup Delay Admin This button displays the startup delay time in seconds.

Ramp Time Admin

Displays the amount of time that it takes for the Economizer togo from the Stopped Setpoint to the Level Setpoint. The time willremain the same even if the Stopped setpoint is 10% below the LevelSetpoint.

ChangeSetpoints Admin This enables a green box to be displayed which can be scrolled

through the 3 Economizer PID gain settings.

ManualIncrement Service

This oversized button will also contain a text box displaying theEconomizer Level Control Valve Manual Increment for manualcontrol.

Open Service

Pressing this button will set the Economizer Level Control ValveMode to Manual, if it had been in Auto. It will increase the currentEconomizer Level Control Valve Command by an amount equal tothe Manual Increment, with a maximum of 100.0%.

Close Service

Pressing this button will set the Economizer Level Control ValveMode to Manual, if it had been in Auto.It will decrease the currentEconomizer Level Control Valve Command by an amount equal tothe Manual Increment, with a minimum of 0.0%.

Set Service

Pressing this button will open a dialog box where the user canmanually enter a valve command. Once a value has been enteredand the Enter key pressed, the Economizer Level Control Valve Modeshall be set to Manual, if it had been in Auto and the EconomizerLevel Control Valve Command shall be set to the entered value.

Auto ServicePressing this button will set the Economizer Level Control ValveMode to Auto Control. This button will only be available and activewhen the Economizer Level Control Valve Mode is Manual

Table 39: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerCompressor View Returns User to Economizer Screen.


Proximity probe calibration screenChillers with J or H3 compressors

Figure 18: Proximity probe calibration screen (chillers with J or H3 compressors)

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller compressor, revealing the Proximity Probe sensorand provides the capability of calibrating the Proximity Probe sensor.


Table 40: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionHigh Speed Thrust BearingProximity Position

Displays the distance between the high-speed thrust collar and theProximity Probe that is used to measure the position.

High Speed Thrust BearingProximity ReferencePosition

Displays the presently defined offset reference position. This value isdefined at the conclusion of a calibration sequence.

Oil Pressure

Displays the pressure differential between the high side oil pressuretransducer (compressor bearing input) and the low side oil pressuretransducer (oil sump). The displayed value includes offset pressurederived from auto-zeroing during the System Prelube. If either ofthe transducers used to calculate this differential is out of range, thedisplay field will show XX.X.

Calibration in Progress(LED) Indicates that the calibration sequence is in progress.

Calibration Messages These are text messages which step the user through the calibrationprocess and indicate its success or failure


Table 41: ProgrammableButton DescriptionEnter Reference Press this key to enter the reference position manually.Start Calibration Press this key to start the calibration.Cancel Calibration Press this key to cancel calibration.Accept Calibration Press this key to accept calibration.

Fault Acknowledge This option is only displayed if a fault is present. Allows clearing ofHigh Speed Thrust Bearing related shutdowns.

Table 42: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Compressor View Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.


Hot gas bypass screen

Figure 19: Hot gas bypass screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the Hot Gas Bypass Valve. The setpoints relating to theHot Gas Bypass Control are maintained on this screen. Related Hot Gas control parameters aredisplayed for reference. The Hot Gas Valve can be manually controlled from this screen. Throughanimation, the relative valve position is displayed. The parameters displayed on this screen varyaccording to the software version and the selection made for the Motor Communications ProtocolSetpoint when equipped with Variable Speed Drive (VSD) or Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive(MVVSD).Table 43: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Valve Position

Displays the present position of the Hot Gas Valve as a valuebetween 0% (closed) to 100% (full open). By animation, the valve isshown in its relative position. The actual position of the valve doesnot match the percentage displayed in the Valve Position Box. Theactual levels and their relative values can be read from Table 44.

Pre-Rotation Vanes Position Displays the present Pre-Rotation Vanes position as a value between0% (closed) and 100% (full open).

Delta P/P Displays the chiller head pressure calculated as (condenser pressure– evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure).

Temperature Differential(LCHLT – Setpoint)

Displays the difference between the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature and the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint.


Table 43: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Surge Avoidance SurgeCount

This is the total number of surges accumulated by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD or MVVSD, it is only thesurges detected while the drive is running at maximum frequency.

Surge Avoidance SurgeDetected (LED)

Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD or MVVSD these areonly the surges detected while the drive is running at maximumfrequency.

It illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD, it illuminates whenever asurge is detected, regardless of the VSD operating speed.

Hot Gas Bypass ControlMode

Indicates whether the Hot Gas Bypass is under automatic, manualor override control. When in manual control, it is controlled fromthis screen. When in override control, Minimum Load, VSD Overrideor VGD Override is displayed as appropriate. Refer to the OptiViewControl Center Service Manual for details of these messages.

Table 44: Valve positionActual position Valve position %0% to 19% 0% (fully closed)20% to 39% 25% open40% to 59% 50% open60% to 79% 75% opengreater than 79% 100% (fully open)


ClosePercentage Service

(5 to 15% Default 15%)

This is the incremental amount that the Hot Gas Valve will be closedat 10 minute intervals after the HOLD period has elapsed.

Hold Period Service

(30 to 120 minutes; default 30 minutes)

This is the period of time after no more surges are detected that theHot Gas Valve closing will begin.

MinimumLoad Service

(0 to 4°F; default 0°F)

This sets the offset below the Leaving Chilled Liquid TemperatureSetpoint at which the Hot Gas Valve will be opened to the positionallowed by the Maximum Open Setpoint.

MaximumOpen –

(25 to 100%)

The maximum allowable position for the Hot Gas Valve during aMinimum load override condition.


Table 45: ProgrammableButton Access level Description[Hot GasBypassControl]Open(Manual)

– Puts the Hot Gas Bypass valve in manual control mode. Each timethis key is pressed, the valve position is increased by 5%.

[Hot GasBypassControl]Close(Manual)

– Puts the Hot Gas Bypass valve in manual control mode. Each timethis key is pressed, the valve position is decreased by 5%.

[Hot GasBypassControl] Auto

– Returns the Hot Gas Bypass Control to automatic mode.

Table 46: NavigationButton Access Level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Compressor View Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.


Surge protection screen

Figure 20: Surge protection screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller compressor and all parameters relating to theSurge Protection feature. All setpoints relating to this screen are maintained on this screen.The Surge Protection feature detects surge events and provides a running count of the surgesdetected over the lifetime of the chiller. It allows the user to define how many surges are excessiveand how the control will react to an excess surge condition. When excess surging is detected, itcan be configured to shutdown the chiller, or initiate a surge avoidance mode while allowing it tocontinue to run or simply display a warning message. The sensitivity of this surge detection is setby the Sensitivity Setpoint on this screen. The surges detected by this feature are also used for theHot Gas Bypass feature (Refer to Hot gas bypass screen).The detection and counting of surges in this feature is completely independent of the surgedetection/counting performed by the Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC)Surge Detection. The ACC Surge Detection creates a surge map used to control the speed of thedrive. The ACC Surge Detection is performed in the MicroboardTable 47: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Delta P/PA parameter that represents the system differential or HeadPressure. It is calculated as (condenser pressure – evaporatorpressure) / evaporator pressure.


Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD or MVVSD these areonly the surges detected while the drive is running at maximumfrequency.

Surge Avoidance SurgeCount

This is the total number of surges accumulated by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD or MVVSD, it is only thesurges detected while the drive is running at maximum frequency.



Surge Window Time

When the chiller enters run mode, this value counts up to the timeprogrammed as the Count Window Setpoint. When it reaches theCount Window minutes, the number of surge events in the oldestminute is discarded and the number of surge events in the mostrecent minute is added, thus providing a rolling count of the totalsurge events that have occurred in the last Count Window minutes.This value is reset when the chiller shuts down.

Surge Window Count

Displays the number of surge events that have occurred in the last 1to 5 minutes as programmed with the Count Window Setpoint. If thechiller has been running for less than the Count Window minutes,it is the number of surge events that have occurred within the lastnumber of minutes displayed as the Surge Window Time. The countis cleared when the chiller shuts down.

Extended Run TimeRemaining

Displays the time remaining in the 10-minute Extended Run period.During this period, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven closedand WARNING – SURGE PROTECTION – EXCESS SURGE LIMIT isdisplayed. Refer to operation under Count Limit in Table 48.


Count Limit Operator

Allows the user to define the maximum number of surge events(4 to 20; default 15) that can occur within a defined period of timebefore an Excess Surge situation is detected. If the Surge WindowCount exceeds the Count Limit, an Excess Surge situation hasoccurred*.

CountWindow Operator

Allows the user to define the period of time (1 to 5 minutes; default3) in which the number of surge events (Surge Window Count) arecompared to the maximum allowed (Count Limit), for the purposeof detecting an Excess Surge situation.

Clear SurgeCount Admin Allows user to set the Surge Count to zero.



Shutdown(Enabled/Disabled)

Operator

Allows the user to select whether the chiller will shutdown orcontinue to run when an Excess Surge situation has been detected.

If this setpoint is Enabled and the Extended Run Setpoint isDisabled, a safety shutdown is performed when the Surge WindowCount exceeds the Count Limit Setpoint.

If this setpoint is Enabled and the Extended Run Setpoint is Enabled,a safety shutdown is performed if the Surge Window Count exceedsthe Count Limit Setpoint at the completion of the 10 minuteExtended Run period.

Surge Protection – Excess Surge is displayed with either shutdown.Ifthis setpoint is Disabled, refer to operation under Count Limit in thissection.

• If equipped with a compressor Variable Speed Drive (VSD),the VSD output frequency must be at maximum beforethe Shutdown feature is implemented or Surge Warningmessages are displayed.

• If equipped with a VSD and Hot Gas Bypass (Enabled), the VSDoutput frequency must be at maximum and the Hot Gas Valvemust be at 100% before the Shutdown feature is implementedor Surge warning messages are displayed.

ExtendedRun(Enabled/Disabled)

Operator

Allows the user to select the surge correction/avoidance ExtendedRun mode. This will be implemented when an Excess Surge situationis detected as follows:

Anytime the Surge Window Count exceeds the Count Limit, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven closed for the next 10 minutes. Whilethis load inhibit is in effect, WARNING – SURGE PROTECTION –EXCESS SURGE LIMIT is displayed. When 10 minutes have elapsed,the warning message and load inhibit are automatically cleared,provided the Surge Window Count is less than or equal to the CountLimit. If the Shutdown Setpoint is Enabled, and the Surge WindowCount exceeds the Count Limit at the completion of this period, asafety shutdown is performed and Surge Protection – Excess Surgeis displayed.

If the Hot Gas Bypass control is Enabled, the Hot Gas BypassValve position must be 100% before the Extended Run mode isimplemented. If the chiller is equipped with a Compressor MotorVariable Speed Drive, output frequency must be at full speed(50Hz/60Hz) before the Extended Run mode is implemented. If thechiller is equipped with both Hot Gas Bypass and Compressor MotorVariable Speed Drive, both of the conditions must be met beforeExtended Run is implemented.



SurgeSensitivity Service

Allows the user to define the surge detection sensitivity of theSurge Protection feature. The Surge Sensitivity Setpoint on theACC DETAILS Screen sets the sensitivity of the ACC Surge Detectionfeature that is employed for ACC Surge Detection. Selectable overthe range of 0.3 to 1.3; default 0.3. The smaller the number, thegreater the sensitivity.

Note: *

When an Excess Surge situation is detected, the action depends upon the following:

• If both the Shutdown and Extended Run Setpoints are Disabled, the chiller will continueto run, displaying the message WARNING – EXCESS SURGE DETECTED. Refer to HotGas Bypass and Variable Speed Drive exceptions. See Shutdown (Enabled/Disabled) andExtended Run (Enabled/Disabled) in Table 48.

• If the Shutdown Setpoint is Enabled and the Extended Run Setpoint is Disabled, thechiller will perform a safety shutdown and display Surge Protection – Excess Surge. Referto Hot Gas Bypass and Variable Speed Drive exceptions. See Shutdown (Enabled/ Disabled)and Extended Run (Enabled/Disabled) in Table 48.

• If the Shutdown Setpoint is Disabled and the Extended Run Setpoint is Enabled, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven closed for 10 minutes and WARNING – SURGE PROTECTION– EXCESS SURGE LIMIT is displayed. When the 10 minutes have elapsed, if the SurgeWindow Count is less than or equal to the Count Limit, this message and load inhibitare automatically cleared. Alternating with this message is WARNING – EXCESS SURGEDETECTED that continues after the 10 minute period has elapsed until manually clearedwith the WARNING RESET key. Refer to Hot Gas Bypass and Variable Speed Driveexceptions. See Shutdown (Enabled/Disabled) and Extended Run (Enabled/Disabled) in Table48.

• If both the Shutdown and Extended Run Setpoint are Enabled, the 10 minute ExtendedRun mode is invoked as described above. However, if the Surge Window Count exceedsthe Count Limit at the completion of the 10 minute Extended Run period, a safetyshutdown is performed and Surge Protection – Excess Surge is displayed. Refer to HotGas Bypass and Variable Speed Drive exceptions. See Shutdown (Enabled/Disabled) andExtended Run (Enabled/Disabled) in Table 48.



Variable Geometry Diffuser screen

Figure 21: VGD screen

This screen displays information pertinent to the VGD operation. Also, the VGD can be manuallycontrolled from this screen.Table 50: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Stall Detector Voltage Displays the Stall Detector output voltage (x.xxVDC), as received bythe Microboard.

Discharge Pressure Displays the Discharge Pressure.Condenser Pressure Displays the Condenser Pressure.

Pre-Rotation Vanes PositionDisplays the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes over the range of 0%(fully closed) to 100% (fully open). Displayed as XXX until calibrationprocedure is performed by Service Technician.

VGD Closed Limit SwitchDisplays the status of the VGD Limit Switch. Displayed as CLOSEDwhen the switch is closed. This would be when the VGD is in the fullyclosed position. Otherwise, it is displayed as OPEN.

Diffuser Gap Close (LED) Illuminates when a close signal is being applied to the VGD.Diffuser Gap Open (LED) Illuminates when an open signal is being applied to the VGD.


Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD or MVVSD, these areonly the surges detected while the drive is running at maximumfrequency.



ACC Surge Detected (LED)

Only displayed if equipped with a VSD or MVVSD. Illuminatesmomentarily when a surge is detected by the ACC function inthe Microboard, while the drive is running at less than maximumfrequency.

VGD Count

Displays the number of times the Stall Detector Board outputvoltage goes above the High Limit Setpoint. The count can becleared with an ADMIN access level using the VGD CYCLE COUNTkey on the VGD SETPOINTS Screen.

VGD Time ( __Days __Hrs__Min __Sec)

Displays the accumulated time the Stall Detector Board outputvoltage is greater than the High Limit Setpoint while the chiller isrunning.

Control StatusDisplays the current state of the VGD control. The states are: StallWaiting, Stall Reacting, Probing, Surge Reacting, Surge Waiting, HotGas Override.

Time RemainingWhile the VGD is in the Stall Waiting State, displays the timeremaining in the Probe Wait Time interval (value programmed asthe Probe Wait Time setpoint).

Diffuser Gap Control Mode Indicates whether the VGD is under manual or automatic control.

Table 51: ProgrammableButton Access level Description[VGD] Open(Manual) Service This key puts the VGD in manual mode and sends an OPEN

command to the VGD[VGD] Close(Manual) Service This key puts the VGD in manual mode and sends a CLOSE

command to the VGD.[VGD] Hold(Manual) Service This key puts the VGD in manual mode and sends a HOLD command

to the VGD.

Table 52: NavigationButton Access Level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Compressor View Returns user to COMPRESSOR Screen.VGDSetpoints Service Move to the subscreen that allows programming of the Variable

Geometry Diffuser setpoints


Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints screen

Figure 22: Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints screen

The Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints are maintained on this screen. All setpoints require alogin access level of Service.



Stall Detector Voltage Displays the Stall Detector output voltage, as received by theMicroboard.

Discharge Pressure Displays the Discharge Pressure.Condenser Pressure Displays the Condenser Pressure

Pre-Rotation Vanes PositionDisplays the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes over the range of 0%(fully closed) to 100% (fully open). Displayed as XXX until calibrationprocedure is performed by Service Technician.

VGD Closed Limit SwitchDisplays the status of the VGD Limit Switch. Displayed as CLOSEDwhen the switch is closed. This would be when the VGD is in the fullyclosed position. Otherwise, the switch is displayed as open.

Diffuser Gap Close (LED) Illuminates when a close signal is being applied to the VGD.Diffuser Gap Open (LED) Illuminates when an open signal is being applied to the VGD.


Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the SurgeProtection feature. If equipped with a VSD or MVVSD, these areonly the surges detected while the drive is running at maximumfrequency.



ACC Surge Detected (LED)

Only displayed if equipped with a VSD or MVVSD. Illuminatesmomentarily when a surge is detected by the ACC function inthe Microboard, while the drive is running at less than maximumfrequency.

VGD Count

Displays the number of times the Stall Detector Board outputvoltage goes above the High Limit Setpoint. The count can be resetwith an ADMIN access level using the VGD CYCLE COUNT key on theVGD SETPOINTS Screen.

VGD Time

( __Days __Hrs __Min __Sec)

Displays the accumulated time the Stall Detector Board outputvoltage is greater than the High Limit Setpoint while the chiller isrunning.

Control StatusDisplays the current state of the VGD control. The states are: StallWaiting, Stall Reacting, Probing, Surge Reacting, Surge Waiting, HotGas Override.

Time RemainingWhile the VGD is in the Stall Waiting State, displays the timeremaining in the Probe Wait Time interval (value programmed asthe Probe Wait Time setpoint).


Surge React –

1 to 30 seconds; default 5

Specifies the length of the close pulse applied to the VGD inresponse to a surge.

PRV Offset –

0 to 5%; default 3

If the VGD control is in the Stall Waiting state and the Pre-RotationVanes position changes by more than this value, the Probing statewill be entered. If the PRV Offset is set to 0%, the Stall Waiting stateis performed based only on the Probe Wait Time setpoint interval.

Probe Wait –

0.5 to 15 minutes; default 10

Specifies how long the VGD control remains in the Stall Waiting orSurge Waiting states before entering the Probing state.

Open Pulse –

1 to 5 seconds; default 2

Specifies the length of the open pulse applied to the VGD during 10second periods while in the Probing state.



High Limit –

0.5 to 1.2VDC; default 0.6VDC

Specifies the Stall Detector Board output voltage that represents anacceptable amount of stall noise.

The minimum difference between the High Limit Setpoint and theLow Limit Setpoint is 0.1VDC. If a Low Limit Setpoint is enteredwhich is less than 0.1VDC below the High Limit Setpoint, the HighLimit Setpoint is adjusted so that it is 0.1VDC above the newlyentered Low Limit value.

Low Limit –

0.3 to 0.8VDC; default 0.5VDC

In the Stall Reacting State, the VGD is driven closed until the StallDetector Board output voltage decreases to this level.

The minimum difference between the High Limit Setpoint and theLow Limit Setpoint is 0.1VDC. If a Low Limit Setpoint is enteredwhich is less than 0.1VDC below the High Limit Setpoint, the HighLimit Setpoint is adjusted so that it is 0.1VDC above the newlyentered Low Limit value.

VGD Count Admin Allows the user to clear the VGD Cycle Count.

Extreme StallDuration –

10 to 20 minutes; default 10

Specifies the maximum allowed time an extreme stall condition canexist before the VGD operation is disabled and driven to the fullopen position to protect it from damage.

PRV VGDInhibit –

40% - 100% default 100%

While the Pre-Rotation Vanes position is greater than this setpoint,extreme stall conditions are not checked, the VGD control isinhibited and the VGD is pulsed open according to the Open PulseSetpoint. While this is in effect, PRV Position Override is displayed asControl Status.

Table 55: NavigationButton Access Level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME Screen.VGD Screen Service Returns user to VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER Screen


Economizer compressor Variable Geometry Diffuser screen

Figure 23: Economizer compressor VGD screen

This screen displays information pertinent to the Economizer VGD operation. Also, the EconomizerVGD can be manually controlled from this screen.Table 56: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Stall Detector Voltage Displays the Stall Detector output voltage as received by theMicroboard.

High Limit Displays the voltage, that if exceeded, will result in the VGD closingto prevent a stall from occurring.

Low Limit Displays the voltage, that if has dropped below the setpoint, willcause the VGD to open, allowing more gas through the compressor.

Mach Number Displays the speed of the refrigerant gas leaving the compressor inpercentage of Mach (the speed of sound).

VGD Closed Limit SwitchDisplays the status of the VGD Limit Switch. Displayed as CLOSEDwhen the switch is closed. This would be when the VGD is in the fullyclosed position. Otherwise, displayed as OPEN.

VGD Opening (LED) Illuminates when a close signal is being applied to the VGD.VGD Closing (LED) Illuminates when an open signal is being applied to the VGD.

Stall Count Displays the number of times that the system had detected anEconomizer Compressor Stall.

Stall TimeDisplays the accumulated time that the Stall Detector Board outputis greater than the High Limit Setpoint voltage while the chiller isrunning.



Discharge Pressure Displays the current discharge pressure of the economizercompressor.

Economizer Pressure Shows the pressure within the economizer.Head Pressure Shows the head pressure of the economizer.

PRV Position Displays the position of the pre rotation vanes in percent. Fully openis 100% and fully closed is 0%.

VGD Control State

Shows the current state of the VGD Control. It will show variousmessages as follows:

• Undefined• Disabled• Stall Waiting• Probing• Stall Reacting• PRV Override• Sensor Failure Override• Extreme Stall Override• Manual Hold• Manual Open• Manual Close• Inactive


VGD Actuator Service Displays the current state of the VGD Actuator. It will show eitherAuto or Manual.

Open (withLED) Service Pressing this button will send a command to open the VGD. The LED

will indicate on.Close (withLED) Service Pressing this button will send a command to close the VGD. The LED

will indicate on.Hold Service Pressing this button will hold the VGD in it's current position.Auto Service Pressing this button returns the VGD to automatic

Table 58: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerCompressor Service Pressing this button will return to the Economizer Compressor

Screen.

Setpoints Service Pressing this button will navigate to the Economizer VGD SetpointsScreen.


Economizer Variable Geometry Diffuser setpoints screen

Figure 24: Economizer VGD setpoints screen

This screen displays information for the Economizer VGD Setpoints information. Also, theEconomizer VGD Setpoints can be changed from this screen.Table 59: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Stall Detector Voltage Displays the Stall Detector output voltage as received by theMicroboard.

High Limit Displays the voltage. If the voltage is exceeded the VGD will close toprevent the unit from stalling.

Low Limit Displays the voltage, that if has dropped below the setpoint, willcause the VGD to open, allowing more gas through the compressor.

Mach Number Displays the speed of the refrigerant gas leaving the compressor inpercentage of Mach (the speed of sound).

VGD Closed Limit SwitchDisplays the status of the VGD Limit Switch. Displayed as CLOSEDwhen the switch is closed. This would be when the VGD is in the fullyclosed position. Otherwise, displayed as OPEN.

VGD Opening (LED) Illuminates when a close signal is being applied to the VGD.VGD Closing (LED) Illuminates when an open signal is being applied to the VGD.



Stall Count Displays the number of times that the system had detected anEconomizer Compressor Stall.

Stall TimeDisplays the accumulated time that the Stall Detector Board outputis greater than the High Limit Setpoint voltage while the chiller isrunning.

VGD Control State

Shows the current state of the VGD Control. It will show variousmessages as follows:

• Undefined• Disabled• Stall Waiting• Probing• Stall Reacting• PRV Override• Sensor Failure Override• Extreme Stall Override• Manual Hold• Manual Open• Manual Close• Inactive


Extreme StallDuration Service

(10 to 20 minutes; default 10 minutes.)

The Extreme Duration override occurs when the Variable GeometryDiffuser (VGD) stall voltage is two times higher than the high limitfor longer than 10 minutes. At this time, the VGD will be opened anda warning message displayed. The VGD will remain open until thewarning is manually cleared by the operator. Once cleared, the VGDControl will return to normal operation.

PRV VGDInhibit Service

(40 to 100%, Default 95%)

If PRV position is greater than the PRV VGD Inhibit (95%), the VGDwill open in pulse mode just the same way as in the Probing state.

PRV Offset Service

(0 to 5%, Default 3%)

When VGD control enters the Wait State, the PRV position is PRVwait Start position. During the Wait state, if PRV position is greaterthan the PRV wait Start + 3%, the VGD control will enter the Probingstate.



Stall WaitTime Service

(0.5 to 15 minutes, Default 10 minutes)

After the VGD control detects a stall and enters Stall Wait State. Itwill wait for 10 minutes before going into the probing (Open) mode.

Open Pulse Service

(1 to 5 seconds, Default 2 seconds)

In the Probing State, VGD opens in pulse. The pulse length is 10seconds. The VGD will open for 2 seconds and hold during the restof the pulse period (8 seconds). This pulse repeats the 10 secondpulse over and over again until the stall voltage is higher than thehigh limit.

High Limit Service

(0.35 to 1.20V, Default 0.8V)

If stall voltage is higher than high limit of 0.8V, the VGD controlenters the stall react state that closes the VGD. It will keep closingthe VGD until stall volt is lower than the low limit 0.5V.

Low Limit Service

(0.30 to 0.79V, Default 0.50V)

When stall voltage is lower than low limit, the VGD control enters theWait state.

Table 61: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerVGD Service Pressing this button will return to the Economizer VGD screen.


Pre-Rotation Vanes calibration screen

Figure 25: Pre-Rotation Vanes calibration screen

This screen displays a cutaway view of the chiller compressor, revealing the Pre-Rotation Vanes andprovides the capability of calibrating the Pre-Rotation Vanes for either Variable Speed Drive or HotGas Bypass applications.


Table 62: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionPre-Rotation Vanes Opening(LED) Indicates the vanes are opening.

Pre-Rotation Vanes Closing(LED) Indicates the vanes are closing.

Calibration in Progress(LED) Indicates the calibration sequence is in progress.

Calibration Messages These are text messages which step the user through the calibrationprocess and indicate its success or failure.

Pre-Rotation Vanes Voltage Displays the Pre-Rotation Vanes position potentiometer feedbackvoltage.

Table 63: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionStartCalibration Service This option is hidden after calibration has started.

CancelCalibration Service This option only becomes available after calibration has started.


VSD tuning screen

Figure 26: VSD tuning screen

This screen applies to both Variable Speed Drives (VSD) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives(MVVSD). It displays a cutaway view of the chiller compressor, revealing the Pre-Rotation Vanes.Animation of the Pre-Rotation Vanes indicates their position. In addition, this screen allows manualcontrol of the vanes and manual control of the Command Frequency being sent to drive.



Output Frequency Displays the frequency at which the drive is operating the motor.This value is returned from the drive.

Pre-Rotation Vanes Position Displays the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes in percent over therange of 0% (full close) to 100% (full open).

Delta P/P Displays the chiller head pressure calculated as (condenser pressure- evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure).



Frequency Control Mode Displays whether the Command Frequency to the drive is derivedfrom manual or automatic frequency control mode.

Command FrequencyWhen equipped with a VSD or equipped with a MVVSD, this is thespeed command being sent to the Drive Logic Board in either Autoor Manual Speed Control mode.

% Full Load Amps Displays the motor current as a percentage of chiller Full LoadAmps.


Table 65: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionOutput Current – Phase A, B,C Displays the phase current measured to the motor.

Pre-Rotation Vanes ControlMode Indicates whether the vanes are under manual or automatic control.

[Pre-Rotation Vanes] Open(LED) Illuminates when an OPEN command is being sent to the vanes.

[Pre-Rotation Vanes] Close(LED) Illuminates when a CLOSE command is being sent to the vanes.


Set Service

Allows manual programming of the Command Frequency value.Manually programming this value will put the drive frequencycontrol in Manual Speed Control mode and send the programmedCommand Frequency to the drive.

Auto ServicePuts the drive frequency control in automatic control. The Pre-Rotation Vanes calibration must have been successfully performedbefore this entry will be accepted.

Fixed Service Puts the drive frequency control in fixed speed mode, commandingit to run at maximum frequency (50 or 60 Hz).

Raise Service

Puts the drive frequency control into manual mode. Each time it ispressed it increases the Command Frequency to the drive by theamount defined by the MANUAL INCREMENT key. It will not raisethe value above the maximum allowed (50 or 60 Hz).

Lower Service

Puts the drive frequency control into manual mode. Each time itis pressed it lowers the Command Frequency to the drive by theamount defined by the MANUAL INCREMENT key. It will not lowerthe value below the minimum allowed; (30Hz for 60Hz units; 25Hzfor 50Hz units).


Defines the amount by which the manual Raise and Lowercommands will change the Command Frequency to the drive inManual Speed Control mode.

[Pre-RotationVanes] Open Service Puts the vane control into manual mode and sends an OPEN

command to the vanes.[Pre-RotationVanes] Close Service Puts the vanes control into manual mode and sends a CLOSE

command to the vanes.[Pre-RotationVanes] Hold Service Puts the vane control into manual control and sends a HOLD

command to the vanes.[Pre-RotationVanes] Auto Service Puts the vane control into automatic mode.


Oil sump screen

Figure 27: Oil sump screen

This screen displays a close-up of the chiller oil sump and provides all the necessary setpoints formaintaining the Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP). In addition, this screen allows manual control ofthe frequency command sent to the VSOP.Table 68: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

Oil Pressure –

Displays the pressure differential between the high side oilpressure transducer (output of oil filter) and the low side oilpressure transducer (compressor housing). The displayed valueincludes offset pressure derived from auto-zeroing during theSystem Prelube. (Refer to explanation of auto-zeroing in Primarycompressor screen). If either of the transducers used to calculatethis differential is out of range, the display field will show XX.X.

Oil SumpTemperature – Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.

Oil –SaturatedCondenserTemperatureDifferential

–

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) Displays the difference between theOil Sump Temperature and the Saturated Condenser Temperature.This parameter is useful when analyzing oil heater operation since itis used in the control of the oil heater.

Pump OilPressure(HOP)

– Displays the high side oil pressure measured at the compressorbearing input.



Sump OilPressure(LOP)

– Displays the low side oil pressure measured at the sump.

Oil PumpRun Output(LED)

– Indicates whether the oil pump is being commanded to operate.

Oil ReturnSolenoid(LED)

– Indicates whether the solenoid is energized.

Oil Heater(LED) – (Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) Indicates whether the oil heater

output is energized.Oil SealLubricationTimeRemaining

Service If a Seal Lubrication is in progress, this will display the amount oftime remaining in the lubrication process.

Next Oil SealLubrication Service This display will show the time remaining until the next Seal

Lubrication is necessary, when this function is enabled.

Setpoint OilPressure –

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) The Variable Speed Oil Pump(VSOP), if installed, operates to control to a defined Oil Pressurevalue. During prelube, and for the first 15 seconds after prelube, thissetpoint value is 45.0 PSID. During this time, this field will displaythe target value. After 15 seconds, this value will display the user-programmed setpoint Oil Pressure.

VariableSpeedOil PumpControlMode

– (Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) Indicates whether the VariableSpeed Oil Pump speed is under manual or automatic control.


–

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) Displays the actual speed commandbeing sent to the VSOP. This value could be the result of automaticcontrol based on the Oil Pressure Setpoint, or the result of a manualspeed command.

ManualOil PumpOperationTime Left

– Displays the time remaining in the 10-minute Manual Oil Pumpoperation described below.



Standby Lube(Enabled /Disabled)

Service

Allows the user to enable or disable the standby lube operation.When enabled, this function causes the oil pump to operate for aperiod of two (2) minutes at 24 hour intervals from when the oilpump was last run for at least 2 minutes.

EconomizerOil Pump Service Allows the user to navigate to the Economizer Oil Pump Screen.

PressureSetpoint Service

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) The Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP)operates to control to a defined Oil Pressure value. This key allowsthe user to define the setpoint for the VSOP control.

ControlPeriod(VariableSpeed OilPump Only)

Service(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) By default, the automatic VSOPcontrol algorithm operates every 300 ms. This key allows the user tospecify the control period in multiples of 300 ms.

VariableSpeed OilPump SpeedControl: Set

Service This key allows the user to specify automatic or a fixed manualspeed at which the VSOP will run.

Raise Service This key puts the VSOP control into manual mode and incrementsthe present speed command by 0.5 Hz.

Lower Service This key puts the VSOP control into manual mode and decrementsthe present speed command by 0.5 Hz.

Set Service This key allows the user to set the VSOP manual speed between 25and 60 Hz .

Auto Service This key returns the VSOP to automatic mode where control is basedon the Oil Pressure Setpoint.

ManualPump Operator

This key puts the oil pump control in manual mode and forces itto RUN. The oil pump is limited to running for a maximum of ten(10) minutes. If a longer running time is desired, this key mustbe pressed again. Manual Oil Pump control is disabled (and thebutton hidden) during System Prelube, System Run, Proximity ProbeCalibration, Seal Lubrication, and System Coastdown.



Economizer oil pump screen

Figure 28: Economizer oil pump screen

This screen displays a close-up of the chiller economizer oil sump and provides all the necessarysetpoints for maintaining the Economizer Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP). In addition, this screenallows manual control of the frequency command sent to the VSOP.Table 71: DisplayField/LEDname Access level Description

Oil Pressure –

Displays the pressure differential between the high side oil pressuretransducer (output of oil filter) and the low side oil pressuretransducer (compressor housing). The displayed value includesoffset pressure derived from auto-zeroing during the SystemPrelube (refer to explanation of auto-zeroing in Primary compressorscreen). If either of the transducers used to calculate this differentialis out of range, the display field will show XX.X.

Oil SumpTemperature – Displays the temperature of the oil in the sump.

Pump OilPressure(HOP)

– Displays the high side oil pressure measured at the compressorbearing input.

Sump OilPressure(LOP)

– Displays the low side oil pressure measured at the sump.

Oil PumpRun Output(LED)

– Indicates whether the oil pump is operating.


Table 71: DisplayField/LEDname Access level Description


– Displays, in Hertz, the frequency being used to power the Oil Pump.

VariableSpeedOil PumpControlMode

–

Displays the control mode of the oil pump. It will show the followingmessages depending on what the system is doing:

• Off• Pulldown Fixed• Pulldown Pre-Lube• Pulldown Running• Auto• Manual• Hold

Next Oil SealLubrication Service This display will show the time remaining until the next Seal

Lubrication is necessary, when this function is enabled.

Setpoint OilPressure –

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) The Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP)operates to control to a defined Oil Pressure value. During prelube,and for the first 15 seconds after prelube, this setpoint value is 45.0PSID. During this time, this field will display the target value. After15 seconds, this value will display the user-programmed setpoint OilPressure.


–

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) Displays the actual speed commandbeing sent to the VSOP. This value could be the result of automaticcontrol based on the Oil Pressure Setpoint, or the result of a manualspeed command.

ManualOil PumpOperationTime Left

– Displays the time remaining in the 10-minute Manual Oil Pumpoperation described below.


Raise Service This key puts the VSOP control into manual mode and increases thepresent speed command by 0.5 Hz to a maximum of 60.0 Hz.

Lower Service This key puts the VSOP control into manual mode and decreases thepresent speed command by 0.5 Hz to a minimum of 25.0 Hz.

Set Service This key allows the user to specify the manual speed which the VSOPwill run between 25 and 60 Hz.



ManualPump(Enabled/Disabled

Operator

This key puts the oil pump control in manual mode and forces itto RUN. The oil pump is limited to running for a maximum of ten(10) minutes. If a longer running time is desired, this key mustbe pressed again. Manual Oil Pump control is disabled (and thebutton hidden) during System Prelube, System Run, Proximity ProbeCalibration, Seal Lubrication, and System Coastdown.

Standby Lube(Enabled /Disabled)

Service

Allows the user to enable or disable the standby lube operation.When enabled, this function causes the oil pump to operate for aperiod of two (2) minutes at 24- hour intervals from when the oilpump was last run for at least 2 minutes.

PressureSetpoint Service

(Variable Speed Oil Pump Only) The Variable Speed Oil Pump (VSOP)operates to control to a defined Oil Pressure value. This key allowsthe user to define the setpoint for the VSOP control.

Table 73: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Oil Sump View Returns the user to the OIL SUMP Screen.


Economizer capacity control screen

Figure 29: Economizer capacity control screen

This screen displays a view of the economizer capacity control setpoints and buttons. It provides allnecessary inputs for manual control of the economizer.Table 74: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionEconomizing Mode LED LED lights up when the economizer or the Anti Surge is operating.Economizer SaturatedTemperature Displays the saturation temperature within the economizer.

Anti Surge MinimumTemperature

Displays the minimum temperature that the economizer can go tobefore the economizer compressor will start to surge. Efficiency ofthe economizer will be the highest at this point.

Delta TDisplays the temperature that is the result of subtracting theEconomizer Saturation Temperature minus the EconomizerSaturation Temperature Setpoint.

Motor Current % FLA Displays the percent of full load amps of the economizercompressor motor.

Override Threshold

If Motor Current % full load amps is higher than the OverrideThreshold, the capacity control will be overridden, it means theeconomizer prerotation vanes can't be opened more to increase thecapacity.

Boost Mode LED This LED is on whenever the Economizer Operation Mode is Boost orBoost Anti Surge.

Entering Chilled LiquidTemperature

Displays the entering chilled liquid temperature at the evaporatorand the condenser.


Table 74: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionLeaving Chilled LiquidTemperature

Displays the leaving chilled liquid temperature at the evaporatorand the condenser.

Delta TDisplays the temperature that is the result of the Leaving ChilledLiquid Temperature minus the Leaving Chilled Liquid TemperatureActive Setpoint.

Control StateDisplays the control state that the economizer is operating. It couldshow Inactive, Cooling Control, or Motor Current, depending on thepanels Capacity Control State.

Load Limit Displays the Active Load Limit. The following messages could bedisplayed: Inactive, None, or Motor Current.

Anti-Surge Limit LED LED is ON when the Economizer Operation Mode is EconomizingAnti Surge or Boost Anti Surge. LED is off otherwise.

Economizer Head Pressure Displays the economizer head pressure in tenths.Active Output LED LED on the panel lights to indicate Pre-Rotation Vanes are active.

PRV Command Displays the position the Pre-Rotation Vanes are commanded toopen.

PRV Feedback Displays the feedback data used to calculate the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes.

Control ModeShows what state the economizer Pre-Rotation Vane state. It maydisplay Manual, Auto, or Inactive, depending on what is happeningwith the economizer.



Sets the amount the PRV position signal will Increase or Decreasewhen one of those manual control buttons are pressed. (Range isadjustable from 0.1% to 10%, Default = 10%).

Increase Service

Pressing this button with activate the economizer Pre-RotationVane override and set it to Manual, if it was previously in Auto. Itwill increase the Pre-Rotation Vane override position by an amountequal to the Manual Increment.

Auto ServicePressing this button will set the economizer capacity control toAuto. This button will only be shown when the economizer capacitycontrol is Manual.


Table 75: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionEconomizerRun Operator This button will enable or disable the economizer run feature. This

feature is enabled by default.

Decrease Service

Pressing this button with activate the economizer Pre-RotationVane override and set it to Manual if it was previously in Auto. Itwill decrease the Pre-Rotation Vane override position by an amountequal to the Manual Increment.

Set Service

Pressing this button will open a dialog box where the user canmanually enter a command value for the economizer Pre-RotationVanes. Once a value has been entered and the Enter key pressed,the Econ PRV Override Enable will be set to Manual, if it had been inAuto and the Econ Pre-Rotation Vanes Override Position will be setto the entered value. (0% to 100%, Default = 0%).

Table 76: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns the user to the HOME Screen.EconomizerCompressor Service Allows the user to navigate to the Economizer Compressor Screen.

Setpoints Service Returns the user to the Economizer Capacity Control SetpointsScreen.


Economizer capacity control setpoints screen

Figure 30: Economizer capacity control setpoints screen

This screen displays a view of the economizer capacity control setpoints and buttons. Service LevelAccess is required to navigate to this screen.Table 77: AdjustableField/LEDname Access level Description

HighHead forRefrigerantFlow

Service

Range 5 to 150 PSID, Default 64 PSID

This displays the high head setpoints at which the economizerwill activate. These points can be changed according to when theoperator wishes the economizer to start operating.

RefrigerantFlow Criteriaat High Head

Service

Range 100 to 50000 CFM, Default 6000 CFM

Displays the refrigerant flow in CFM that is where the economizerwill activate in the high head condition.

Low Head forRefrigerantFlow

Service

Range 5 to 150 PSID, Default 30 PSID

This displays the low head setpoints at which the economizerwill activate. These points can be changed according to when theoperator wishes the economizer to stop operating.

RefrigerantFlow Criteriaat Low Head

Service


Displays the refrigerant flow in CFM that is where the economizerwill activate in the low head condition.


Table 77: AdjustableField/LEDname Access level Description

Econ StopRefrig FlowOffset

Service


Displays the difference between the refrigerant flow to start theeconomizer and the refrigerant flow to stop the economizer. Thisoffset prevents the economizer from starting and stopping toorapidly.

EconTemperatureSetpointOffset

ServiceRange -6.0 to -2.5°F, Default -2.5°F

Displays the economizer temperature setpoint offset.

Econ StartupDelay Service

Range 0 to 30 minutes, Default 5 minutes

Displays the amount of time set to delay the start of theeconomizer.

Econ StartEcon LevelOffset

ServiceRange 0 to 100%, Default 40%

Shows the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes at full capacity.EconLevel HighShutdown

ServiceRange 80 to 100%, Default 95%

Displays the position of the Pre-Rotation Vanes at full capacity.

Full CapacityPRV Position Service

Range 80 to 100%, Default 95%

Displays the position of the main compressor PRV when it isconsidered to be at Full Capacity.

Econ ExitBoost EconTemp Offset

Service

Range 0 to 5°F, Default 1°F

Displays the offset of the temperature that controls when the chillerexits the boost mode to go into the economizer mode.

Econ PRVStart Position Service

Range 0 to 30%, Default 2%

Displays the starting position of the economizer prerotation vanes.

Table 78: SetpointsButton Access level Description

Econ GearRatioOverride

Admin

Range 0.0 to 7.0, Default 0.0

Shows the override used if the gears are changed to accommodatecustomer performance requirements.

Econ MotorSlip Factor Admin

Range 0.98 to 1.0, Default 0

Displays the slip factor of the motor. A 60 Hz motor isn't truly 60 Hz,but rather a 59% motor. The difference is the slip factor.

EconImpellerDiameterOverride

Admin


Displays the change in size of the impeller if a different unit is usedin the economizer.


Table 78: SetpointsButton Access level DescriptionEconTemperatureControl MaxLoadingDelta

Admin


Displays the maximum temperature difference used to initiatechanges in the economizer mode.

EconTemperatureControl MaxUnloadingDelta

Admin Range 0.1 to 100.0, Default 1.0

EconTemperatureControl Kp

AdminRange 0.1 to 15.0, Default 5.0

Adjusts the Proportional Gain.EconTemperatureControl Ti


Adjusts the Integral Gain.EconTemperatureControl Td


Adjusts the Derivative Gain.

Econ PRVOutput Gain Admin


Displays the output gain used to control the economizer Pre-Rotation Vanes.


ChangeSetpoints

Service orAdmin

Pressing this button will display a green box around the firstprogrammable item on the screen. The arrow keys can be used tomove the box around to select the item to program.

DefaultSetpoints Service

Pressing this button will display a dialog box telling the user to“Press Enter to set all Econ Capacity Control Setpoints to theirdefault value. Press Cancel to leave setpoints unchanged.” If theuser presses Enter, all Econ Capacity Control Setpoints will return tothe default settings.

Table 80: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns the user to the HOME Screen.CapacityControl Service Allows the user to navigate to the Economizer Capacity Control

Screen.Anti-SurgeTuning Service Allows the user to navigate to the Econ Anti-Surge Tuning Screen.


Economizer anti-surge tuning screen

Figure 31: Economizer anti-surge tuning screen

This screen will show all the data and settings relating to capacity control anti-surge setpoints.The following Display only parameters are useful to Engineering to help diagnose an unexpectedsurge issue on a chiller and are not intended for customer or field service use.Table 81: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Economizer anti-surge data

Displays the minimum temperature that the economizer can go tobefore the economizer compressor will start to surge. Efficiency ofthe economizer will be the highest at this point:

• Speed of Sound• Isentropic Head• Omega• Surge Mach• Mach Number• Anti-Surge Minimum Econ Temperature• Active Anti-Surge Minimum Econ Temperature• Min Temperature Rate Maximum• Min Temperature Rate Minimum• Min Frequency Admin Multiplier



Change MinPRV PosSetpoints

Service

Pressing this button will display a green box around the firstprogrammable item in the Min PRV Pos Setpoints section. The arrowkeys can be used to move the box around to select the item toprogram within this section.

MinFrequencyMultiplier

–Range 0.95 to 1.10, Default 1.0

Changing this parameter alters the anti-surge surface shape.

MinTemperatureOffset

–

Range -5.0 to 20.0, Default -2.0

Changing this parameter increases or decreases the anti-surgesurface from the chiller surge conditions.

Table 83: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns the user to the HOME Screen.CapacityControl Service Allows the user to navigate to the Economizer Capacity Control

Screen..

Setpoints Service Allows the user to navigate to the Econ Capacity Control SetpointsScreen.


Condenser refrigerant level control screen

Figure 32: Condenser refrigerant level control screen

This screen shows the data and settings related to the Condenser Refrigerant Level Control.Table 84: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

SubcoolerEffectiveness –

The Subcooler Effectiveness is evaluated with the followingcalculation and compared to a high and low limit. (Cond Sat Temp-Drop Leg Ref Temp)/(Cond Sat Temp-Entering Cond Liq Temp). Thisvalue is typically around 0.8 at design conditions.

CondenserRefrigerantLevel

–

Displays the present position of the liquid level. The refrigerant levelis animated in the cutaway view of the condenser. The actual level ofthe refrigerant in the tank does not match the percentage displayedin the Level Control Valve Command box. The actual levels versusthe displayed percentages are listed in Table 85.

Active LevelSetpoint Service Displays the setpoint to which the refrigerant level is being

controlled. (Adjustable 20 to 80%; default 50%).Level ControlState – Indicates one of the following states the level control routine is in:

Manual, Inactive, Startup Hold, Setpoint Ramp, PID Control or Hold.Level ControlValveCommand

– Indicates the valve command as a percentage of full open.


Table 85: Condenser refrigerant level

Actual level Control valvecommand %

0% to 15% 50%16% to 31% 60%32% to 47% 70%48% to 63% 80%64% to 79% 90%79% 100%


LevelSetpoint Service

Displays the Condenser Level Control Setpoint for the PID control.The value will display in tenths. (Adjustable form 20 to 80%; default50%).

StartupPosition Service

Displays the Startup Position programming button. This button willalso contain a text box displaying the Condenser Level Control ValveStartup Position. The value will display in tenths. (Adjustable 0 to100%; default 50%).

Startup Delay Admin

The amount of time the refrigerant level valve PID waits after startbefore it starts controlling the valve position. This allows the systemto stabilize before making valve position changes. (Can be adjustedat 15 seconds).

Ramp Time Admin

After the chiller has been running for the level control startup delaytime, if the refrigerant level is less than the Level Setpoint, a linearlyincreasing ramp is applied to the Level Setpoint. This ramp allowsthe level to go from the present level to the programmed LevelSetpoint over a period of time programmed as the Ramp Up Time.(1 to 5 minutes; default 1 min).

HighThreshold Service Sets the high limit for the Subcooler Effectiveness Warning

(Adjustable 0 to 100%; default 50%).LowThreshold Service Sets the low limit for the Subcooler Effectiveness Warning

(Adjustable 0 to 100%; default 50%).

Kp Admin Sets the Proportional value of the PID control loop. (Adjustable 0.1to 15; default 0.5).

Ti Admin Sets the Integral value of the PID control loop. (Adjustable 0.1 to500; default 200).

Td Admin Sets the Derivative value of the PID control loop. (Adjustable 0.0 to200; default 0.0).


This sets the percentage the refrigerant valve will manually bedriven with each press of the Open or Close buttons. (0.1 to 10%;default 1.0%).

Open –

Pressing this button will set the Condenser Level Control ValveMode to Manual, if it had been in Auto and will increase the currentCondenser Level Control Valve Command by an amount equal to theManual Increment, with a maximum of 100.0%.



Close –

Pressing this button will set the Condenser Level Control ValveMode to Manual, if it had been in Auto and will decrease the currentCondenser Level Control Valve Command by an amount equal to theManual Increment, with a minimum limit of 0.0%.

Set Service

Pressing this button will open a dialog box where the user canmanually enter a valve command. Once a legitimate value has beenentered and the Enter key pressed, the Condenser Level ControlValve Mode will be set to Manual, if it had been in Auto and theCondenser Level Control Valve Command will be set to the enteredvalue.

Auto Service This button is only displayed when in Manual Level Control. Pressingthis button returns the control to the PID program.

ChangeSetpoints –

This button is only displayed when signed in at Service Level.Pressing this button allows the user to select any of the setpointparameters using the arrow keys.

Table 87: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Condenser Service Returns the user to the CONDENSER screen.


Economizer Solid State Starter screen

Figure 33: Economizer solid state starter screen

The Economizer Solid State Starter Screen displays information about the solid state starter used onthe economizer compressor.Table 88: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Motor Run LED Indicates whether the digital output from the controls iscommanding the motor to RUN.

% Full Load Amps Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA) value.

Override Threshold Displays the motor current upper limit as a % of FLA that thecompressor will be allowed to operate.

Input Power Displays the kilowatts measured by the Solid State Starter.KW Hours Displays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over time.

Starter ModelDisplays the Solid State Starter model that is applied to the chiller.Starter Models are 7L, 14L, 26L or 33L. This value is communicatedby the LCSSS.

Voltage (Phase A, B and C) Displays the 3-phase input line voltage measured by the Solid StateStarter.

Current (Phase A, B and C) Displays the 3-phase motor current values measured by the SolidState Starter.

Temperature (Phase A, Band C)

Displays the temperatures of the Silicon Controlled Rectifierassemblies for each phase.


Table 89: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionFull LoadAmps Service Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can operate. This

value is viewable when logged in at OPERATOR or VIEW access level.

VoltageRange Service

Allows the user to select specific line voltage range for voltagechecking. When not disabled, this line voltage range is used todetermine a low line and high line voltage threshold for initiating ashutdown.

StartingCurrent Service Defines the maximum allowed motor starting amps. The Solid State

Starter will limit the motor Starting Current to this value.KWH Reset Admin Allows the user to reset the cumulative kilowatt hours.Open SCR(Enabled/Disabled)

ServiceAllows the user to enable or disable the Solid State Starter OpenSCR safety detection. This must never be disabled unless underadvisement of the Johnson Controls Factory.

Shorted SCR(Enabled/Disabled)

ServiceAllows the user to enable or disable the Solid State Starter ShortedSCR safety detection. This must never be disabled unless authorizedby Johnson Controls.


Motor Details ServiceMoves to a subscreen that provides information and setpointspertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature if the Motor Monitoringoption is installed.

Motor Lube ViewMoves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledgement of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters.

EconomizerCompressor View Jumps to the Economizer Compressor screen.


Electro-mechanical starter screen

Figure 34: Electro-mechanical starter screen

This screen displays all information pertaining to the Electro-Mechanical Starter.Table 91: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Motor Run (LED) Indicates whether the digital output from the controls iscommanding the motor to RUN.

Motor Current % Full LoadAmps

Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA) value. For the Electro-Mechanical Starter this is the datareturned by the CM-2 board.

Current Limit Setpoint

Displays the current limit value in use. This value could come froma 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in AnalogRemote mode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gatewayinterface in ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.

Pulldown Demand Time Left Displays the time remaining in the programmed pulldown period ifthe value is nonzero.



Local MotorCurrent Limit Operator

Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed motor current (asa percentage of FLA). When the motor current reaches this value,the Pre-Rotation Vanes will not be permitted to open further. If themotor current rises above this value, the Pre-Rotation Vanes willclose to reduce the current to this value.

PulldownDemandLimit

Operator

Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a percentageof FLA) to which the chiller will be limited during the specifiedpulldown limit time. This value will override the Motor CurrentLimit value during this time period. This function is used to provideenergy savings following chiller start-up.

PulldownDemandTime

Operator Allows the user to set a period of time for which the pulldowndemand limit will be in effect after the chiller starts.


Motor Lube ViewMoves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledgement of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters.


Mod “A” Solid State Starter screen

Figure 35: Mod “A” Solid State Starter screen

This screen displays all information pertaining to the Mod “A” Solid State Starter.Table 94: Display onlyField/LED name Description


Motor Heater (LED) Indicates whether the optional Motor Heater is ON or OFF.


Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA) value. This is the data returned by the Starter Logic Board forthe Solid State Starter.


Displays the current limit value in use. This value could come froma 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in AnalogRemote mode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link Gatewayinterface in ISN mode, or a locally programmed value.


Scale/Model Display information about the Liquid Cooled Solid State StarterRating and the maximum allowed Full Load Amps.

Voltage – Phase A, B, C Display the 3-phase input line voltage values being read from theSolid State Starter.

Current – Phase A, B, C Display the 3-phase motor current values being read from the SolidState Starter.





PulldownDemandLimit

Operator


PulldownDemandTime


Full LoadAmps Operator

Define the maximum amps at which the motor can operate. Thisvalue is viewable when logged in under the OPERATOR or VIEWaccess level.

SupplyVoltageRange

Service

Allows the user to select a specific voltage range for voltagechecking. When not disabled, this line voltage range is used todetermine a low line and high line voltage threshold for initiating ashutdown.

CurrentUnbalanceCheck(Enabled /Disabled)

Service Allows the user to control whether the logic checks for currentunbalance and initiates a shutdown as a result.


Motor Lube View

Moves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledgement of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters. Only displayed if Motor Auto Lube type isother than None.

Motor Details Service Moves to a subscreen that provides information and setpointspertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature if this option is installed.


Economizer Solid State Starter screen

Figure 36: Economizer Solid State Starter screen

This screen displays all information pertaining to the Economizer Solid State Starter.Table 97: Display onlyField/LED name Description


Motor Heater (LED) Indicates whether the optional Motor Heater is ON or OFF.Displayed if optional Motor Heater is installed.


Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA) value.

Override Threshold Setpoint

Displays the current limit in use. This value could come from a 0 to20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in Analog Remotemode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, SC-EQ communicationcard in ISN (BAS) Remote mode or a locally programmed value inLocal mode.

Starter Model Displays the Solid State Starter model that is applied to the chiller.Starter Models are 7L, 14L, 26L or 33L.

Voltage – Phase A, B, C Displays the 3-phase input line voltage measured by the Solid StateStarter.

Current – Phase A, B, C Displays the 3-phase motor current values measured by the SolidState Starter.

Temperature – Phase A, B, C Displays the temperatures of the Silicon Controlled Rectifierassemblies.


Table 97: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionPulldown Demand Time Left Displays the time remaining in the programmed pulldown period.Input Power Displays the kilowatts measured by the Solid State Starter.KW Hours Displays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over time.

Table 98: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionFull LoadAmps Service Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can operate. This

value is viewable when logged in at OPERATOR or VIEW access level.

VoltageRange Service

Allows the user to select specific line voltage range for voltagechecking. When not disabled, this line voltage range is used todetermine a low line and high line voltage threshold for initiating ashutdown.

StartingCurrent Service Defines the maximum allowed motor starting amps. The Solid State

Starter will limit the motor starting current to this value.Open SCR(Enabled/Disabled)

ServiceAllows the user to enable or disable the Solid State Starter OpenSCR safety detection. This must never be disabled unless underadvisement of the YORK Factory.

Shorted SCR(Enabled/Disabled)

ServiceAllows the user to enable or disable the Solid State Starter ShortedSCR safety detection. This must never be disabled authorized by aJohnson Controls Representative.

KWH Reset Service Moves to a screen to allow a service technican to reset the KWH.

Motor Details ServiceMoves to a subscreen that provides information and setpointspertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature. Only displayed if thisoption is installed.

Motor Lube ViewMoves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledge-ment of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters. Only displayed if this option is installed.

Table 99: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.EconomizerCompressor Service Moves to a screen displaying the Economizer Compressor

information


Medium voltage Solid State Starter screen

Figure 37: Medium voltage Solid State Starter screen

This screen displays all information pertinent to the Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (MVSSS).Table 100: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Motor Run (LED) Indicates when the OptiView Control Center is commanding themotor to run.

Motor Heater (LED) Indicates whether the optional Motor Heater is ON or OFF.Motor Current % Full LoadAmps

Displays the motor current as a percentage of Job Full Load AmpsSetpoint.


Displays the current limit in use. This value could come from a0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in AnalogRemote mode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link or SC-EQ communications interface in ISN Remote mode or a locallyprogrammed value in Local mode.

Input Power Displays the kilowatts measured by and transmitted from thestarter.

KW HoursDisplays the cumulative kilowatt hours. The microboard calculatesthis value from the Input Power transmitted from the starter. Whenthe number exceeds 999999 KWH, the value will rollover to zero.

Starter Model Displays the starter model number as transmitted from the starter.

Voltage – Phase A, B, C Displays the 3-phase input line voltage as measured by andtransmitted from the starter.

Current – Phase A, B, C Displays the 3-phase motor current as measured by and transmittedfrom the starter.




Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed motor current (asa percentage of FLA). When the motor current reaches this value,the Pre-Rotation Vanes will not be permitted to open further. If themotor current rises above this value, the Pre-Rotation Vanes close toreduce the current to this value.

PulldownDemandLimit

Operator

Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a percentageof FLA) to which the chiller will be limited during the specifiedpulldown time. This value will override the Motor Current LimitSetpoint during this time period. The Pre-Rotation Vanes are used tolimit the motor current to this value.

PulldownDemandTime

Operator Allows the user to set the period of time for which the pulldowndemand limit will be in effect.

Full LoadAmps Service Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can operate. This

value is viewable when logged in at OPERATOR or VIEW access level.StartingCurrent Service Defines the maximum allowed motor starting amps. The starter will

limit the starting current to this value.

kWh Reset Service Allows the Service Technician to set the kWh to a value between 0and 999999.


Motor Lube ViewMoves to a subscreen allowing operator acknowledgement of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters.



Variable Speed Drive (VSD) screen

Figure 38: Variable Speed Drive screen

This screen displays information pertaining to a Variable Speed Drive (VSD).Table 103: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Motor Run (LED)Indicates whether the digital output from the controls iscommanding the motor to RUN. Only displayed if this option isinstalled.


Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA) value.


Displays the current limit value in use. This value could come froma 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in AnalogRemote mode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link or SC-EQ communications interface in ISN mode, or a locally programmedvalue.


Output Voltage Displays the output voltage measured to the motor.Output Frequency Displays the present output frequency to the motor.

Input Power Displays the total kilowatts measured by the VSD or Harmonic Filter,if installed.



KW Hours Displays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over time as theVSD motor controller operates.

Output Current – Phase A, B,C Displays the phase current measured to the motor.

Pre-Rotation Vane Position Displays the Pre-Rotation Vane position as a value between 0 and100%.




PulldownDemandLimit

Operator


PulldownDemandTime


kWH Reset Admin Allows the user to reset the cumulative Kilowatt hours to zero (0).

Filter Inhibit Service(Harmonic Filter installed Only) Disable the filter logic fromactivating, although the system will still communicate with thedevice. Only available when chiller is stopped.


VSD Details View Moves to the subscreen which provides more information about theVariable Speed Drive.

Motor Lube ViewMoves to the subscreen allowing operator acknowledgement of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters. Only displayed if this option is installed.



Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (MVVSD) screen

Figure 39: Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive screen

This screen displays information pertaining to a Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive (MVVSD).For details of MVVSD operation and setpoints, refer to Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive – Service(Form 160.00-M6).Table 106: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Motor Run (LED) Indicates whether the digital output from the controls iscommanding the chiller to run.


Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA).


Displays the current limit value in use. This value could come froma 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in AnalogRemote mode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link or SC-EQ communications interface in ISN mode or a locally programmedvalue.

Pulldown Demand Time Left Displays the time remaining in the programmed pulldown period ifthe value is not zero.

Input Voltage Displays the average of the 3-phase input voltage to the MVVSD.Value is provided by the MVVSD.

Output Voltage Displays the output voltage to the motor. Value is provided by theMVVSD.

Output Frequency Displays the present output frequency to the motor. Value isprovided by the MVVSD.



Input Power Displays the total kilowatts measured by the MVVSD. Value isprovided by the MVVSD.

KW HoursDisplays the cumulative amount of kilowatts used over time as theVSD motor operates. Value is calculated by the OptiView ControlCenter from the Input Power value provided from the MVVSD.

Pre-Rotation Vanes Position Displays the Pre-Rotation Vane position as a value between 0 and100%.

VSD Cooling Fans Output(LED)

Illuminates when the VSD cooling fans are being commanded torun.

Precharge Relay Output(LED) Illuminates when the pre-charge relay is commanded to energize.

Output Current (Phase A, B,C) Displays the three phases of output current to the motor.

DC Bus Voltage (Phase A, B,C) Displays the three phases of DC Bus voltage

MVVSD Model

Displays the model number as received from the MVVSD. The modelnumber is displayed as a number representing the horsepowerrating (ie; 1500HP). It is derived from the Motor Rated Voltageand the Programmed Drive Current values received from the MV-VSD according to the following table Table 107. If this results in amodel that is not defined in the lookup table, the model number isdisplayed as INVALID and the chiller will not be allowed to run whilethis is displayed.

Motor Voltage Rating

Displays the voltage rating of the MVVSD as received from theMVVSD. This is the Motor Voltage Rating as received from theMVVSD. Displayed as 1300V, 3300V or 4160V. If an invalid value isreceived, "Invalid" is displayed and the chiller will not be allowed torun.

Output Frequency Rating

This is the rated output frequency as received from the MVVSD.This value is the maximum drive frequency (Hz) when the MVVSDreceives a 100% speed command from the OptiView Control Center.If the value received is not 50 Hz or 60 Hz, INVALID is displayed. Ifthis is the case, then the Motor Voltage Rating (above) determinesthe maximum frequency as follows:Motor voltage rating Output frequency rating2300 or 4160 V 60 Hz3300 V 50 Hz

Table 107: Motor rated voltage (V)*Model in HP 2300 V 3300 V 4160 V

500 107 A 78 A 62 A600 129 A 93 A 74 A700 157 A 110 A 87 A800 172 A 124 A 99 A


Table 107: Motor rated voltage (V)*Model in HP 2300 V 3300 V 4160 V

900 202 A 141 A 112 A1000 224 A 156 A 125 A1250 280 A 195 A 155 A1500 336 A 235 A 186 A1750 392 A 274 A 217 A2000 438 A 312 A 248 A2250 494 A 345 A 274 A2500 561 A 391 A 310 A

Note: *Max. Job/Rated 100% FLA (A) (Programmed Drive Current)




PulldownDemandLimit

Operator

Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as percentageof FLA) to which the chiller will be limited during the specifiedpulldown limit time. This value will override the Motor CurrentLimit value during this time period. This function is used to provideenergy savings following chiller start-up.

PulldownDemandTime


Full LoadAmps Service

Defines the maximum amps at which the motor can operate thisvalue is viewable when logged in at VIEW or OPERATOR level.The maximum programmable value of this setpoint is equal toProgrammed Drive Current value received from the MVVSD.

KWH Reset Service Allows the user to reset the cumulative Kilowatt hours to zero.


ACC Details Service Moves to a subscreen which provides more information about theAdaptive Capacity Control.

Motor Lube –Moves to a subscreen allowing operator acknowledgement of thecompressor motor lubrication and viewing of the compressor motorlubrication parameters.

Motor Details Service Moves to a subscreen that provides information and setpointspertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature.


Variable Speed Drive (VSD) details screen

Figure 40: VSD details screen

This screen displays more detailed information pertaining to a Variable Speed Drive (VSD) partnumber 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; 419HP 50Hz).



Motor Run(LED) – Indicates whether the digital output from the controls is

commanding the motor to RUN.MotorCurrent %Full LoadAmps

–Displays the motor current as a percentage of the Full Load Amps(FLA) value. For the Variable Speed Drive this is the data returned bythe VSD Logic Board.

Current LimitSetpoint –


PulldownDemandTime Left

– Displays the time remaining in the programmed pulldown period ifthe value is nonzero.

Water PumpOutput (LED) – Indicates whether the relay controlling the water pump output is

energized.



PrechargeRelay Output(LED)

– Indicates whether the relay controlling the precharge output isenergized.

Trigger SCROutput (LED) – Indicates whether the relay controlling the Trigger SCR Output is

energized.DC BusVoltage – Displays the DC Bus voltage as reported by the VSD.

DC InverterLink Current – Displays the DC Inverter link current as reported by the VSD.

InternalAmbientTemperature

– Displays the ambient temperature inside the VSD cabinet asreported by the VSD.

ConverterHeatsinkTemperature

– Displays the heatsink temperature of the converter as reported bythe VSD.

HeatsinkTemperature– Phase A, B,C

–

(Labeled Baseplate Temperatures on VSD with part number371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; 419HP 50Hz). Displays the heatsink(baseplate) temperature of each of the 3-phase voltage regulatorsas reported by the VSD.

VSD Model Service Displays the horsepower configuration of the Variable Speed Drivecontrol.

100% FullLoad Amps – Displays the Full Load Amps value as reported by the VSD.




PulldownDemandLimit

Operator


PulldownDemandTime



Table 112: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.VSD View Returns user to VSD Screen.


Variable Speed Drive (VSD) details screen (VSD with partnumber 371-02767-XXX (60 Hz) or 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz))

Figure 41: Variable Speed Drive (VSD) details screen (VSD with part number 371-02767-XXX (60Hz) or 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz))

This screen displays more detailed information pertaining to a Variable Speed Drive (VSD).










Water PumpOutput (LED) – Indicates whether the relay controlling the water pump output is

energized.



PrechargeRelay Output(LED)

– Indicates whether the relay controlling the precharge output isenergized.

Trigger SCROutput (LED) – Indicates whether the relay controlling the Trigger SCR Output is

energized.DC BusVoltage – Displays the DC Bus voltage as reported by the VSD.

DC InverterLink Current – Displays the DC Inverter link current as reported by the VSD.

InternalAmbientTemperature

– Displays the ambient temperature inside the VSD cabinet asreported by the VSD.

ConverterHeatsinkTemperature

– Displays the heatsink temperature of the converter as reported bythe VSD.

BaseplateTemperature – Displays the baseplate temperature of the 3-phase voltage

regulators as reported by the VSD.

VSD Model Service Displays the horsepower configuration of the Variable Speed Drivecontrol.

100% FullLoad Amps – Displays the Full Load Amps value as reported by the VSD.




PulldownDemandLimit

Operator


PulldownDemandTime




Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) details screenModbus protocol configuration

Figure 42: ACC details screen Modbus protocol configuration

This screen displays detailed information pertaining to the Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC). It isshown above with the OptiView-to-VSD serial communications hardware/interface in the ModbusProtocol Configuration. In this configuration, the microboard communicates directly with the VSDLogic Board using Modbus protocol serial communications. The Microboard performs the ACCfunction. The Motor Communications Protocol Setpoint (on the SETUP Screen) is set to Modbus inthis configuration. All Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives (MVVSD) use Modbus protocol.



% Full Load AmpsDisplays the motor current as a percentage of chiller Full Load Ampsas calculated by the microboard from current values returned fromthe drive Logic Board.


Displays the current limit setpoint value in use. This value couldcome from a 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC inputin Analog Remote mode, PWM input in Digital Remote mode, E-Linkor SC-EQ communications interface in ISN Remote mode or locallyprogrammed value in Local mode.

Motor Run (LED) Illuminated when the Control Center is commanding the drive torun. Otherwise, it is extinguished.

Output Frequency Displays the frequency at which the drive is operating the motor.This value is returned from the drive Logic Board.



Pre-Rotation Vanes Position Displays the present Pre-Rotation Vane position as a value between0% (closed) and 100% (full open).

Delta P/PDisplays chiller head pressure calculated as (condenser pressure -evaporator pressure/evaporator pressure). This value is calculatedby the Microboard.



Command Frequency This is the speed command being sent to the Drive Logic Board ineither Auto or Manual Speed Control mode.

Speed Decrease Inhibit –Surge Map Point (LED)

Illuminates when the Microboard ACC function is unable to reducespeed due to a mapped surge point. Otherwise, it is extinguished.

Mapping Inhibited (LED)

Illuminates when the Microboard ACC function is not permitted tomap points or reduce speed due to unstable Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature, manual speed control, current limit in effect (chillerFLA only) or during Soft Shutdown. Otherwise, it is extinguished.

ACC Surge Detected (LED)Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the ACCfunction in the Microboard, while the drive is running at less thanmaximum frequency.


Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the SurgeProtection feature. This feature only detects surges that occur whilethe drive is running at maximum frequency.

ACC Surge Count Increments when a surge is detected while the drive is running atless than maximum frequency.

Surge Map Point Count Displays the total number of data points contained in the surgemap.


Auto Map Print (Enable/Disable)

When enabled, the ACC surge map values are printed to aconnected printer each time a surge point is mapped, as shown inPrinting.

Surge Map Print Allows the Service Technician to print the entire surge map to aconnected printer, as shown in Printing.

Surge Map ClearAllows the Service Technician to clear the surge map. When this keyis pressed, a dialog box appears requesting a special password toproceed.

VSD Start Frequency

Sets the starting frequency from which the ramp-up will begin.Programmable over the following range:

• 60Hz units – 30 Hz to 60 Hz (default 45 Hz)• 60Hz units with Quick Restart – 30 Hz to 45 Hz (default 45 Hz)• 50 Hz units – 25 Hz to 50 Hz (default 37.5 Hz)• 50 Hz units with Quick Restart – 25 Hz to 37.5 Hz (default 37.5

Hz)



ACC Mapping Enable

Sets the Delta T (Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature - Setpoint)needed to be met to enable surge mapping and speed reductioninitially on startup. Programmable over the range of 0.5°F to 20.0°F(default 1.0°F).

Surge Margin Adjust

This value determines how close the frequency reduction will beallowed to get to the surge line. Programmable over the range of0.0 (default) to 25.0 Hz. Service Technicians should refer to VariableSpeed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M4) prior to adjustingthis setpoint.

Surge Sensitivity

Allows the Service Technician to adjust the sensitivity of the ACCSurge Detection in the Microboard (surges that occur while the driveis running at less than maximum frequency). Programmable overthe range of 1.5 to 2.5 with default of 2.0. Smaller values increasethe sensitivity.

Manual Surge Point

Allows the Service Technician to manually log the present runningoperating conditions into the surge map as a valid surge point.When this key is pressed, a dialog box appears requesting a specialpassword to proceed.

Table 118: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.VSD View Returns user to VSD Screen.Surge Map Service Causes a jump to the subscreen that displays the surge map.


Surge map screen - Table view

Figure 43: Surge map screen - Table view

The surge map can be shown in either Table (default) or List view as selected with the MAP VIEWkey. Shown above is the Table View.In this view, a table is used to graphically represent the surge map in the view window. The X-Axis is Delta P/P, the Y-Axis is Pre-Rotation Vanes position and each drive frequency point in thesurge map is represented by an “X”. To view the details of any mapped point, position the greenbox (□) over the desired “X” using the keypad arrow keys (▲▼◄►). The drive Output Frequency,Pre-Rotation Vanes Position and Delta P/P of the selected point is displayed at the bottom of thescreen under selected. The default position for the green box is in the upper left corner of the viewwindow. Once moved, it will remain at the last position.The Present Operating conditions are indicated with an “*” (as shown above) and are detailed atthe bottom of the screen under present. If the present condition is the same as a mapped point,the “*” will be replaced by an “O”.This screen is applicable to Variable Speed Drives (VSD) (with the Motor Communications ProtocolSetpoint set to Modbus; ACC Board is not present) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives(MVVSD).




Mapping Inhibited (LED)

Illuminates while the Microboard ACC function is not permitted tomap points or reduce speed due to unstable Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature, manual speed control, current limit in effect (chillerFLA only) or during Soft Shutdown. Otherwise, it is extinguished.

ACC Surge Detected (LED)Illuminates momentarily when a surge is detected by the ACCfunction in the Microboard, while the drive is running at less thanmaximum frequency.

Speed Decrease Inhibit –Surge Map Point (LED)

Illuminates when the Microboard ACC function is not permittedto reduce speed due to a mapped surge point. Otherwise, it isextinguished.



Output Frequency

Selected: Displays the drive output frequency of the selected surgepoint.

Present: Displays the present drive output frequency.

Pre-Rotation Vanes PositionSelected: Displays the PRV position of the selected surge point.

Present: Displays the present PRV position.

Delta P/PSelected: Displays the Delta P/P of the selected surge point.

Present: Displays the present Delta P/P.

Table 120: ProgrammableButton DescriptionMap View Allows a Service Technician to change the view from table to list.

Manual Surge Point

Allows the Service Technician to manually log the present runningconditions into the surge map as a valid surge point. When this keyis pressed, a dialog bog appears requesting a special password toproceed.

Remove Surge Point

Allows the Service Technician to remove a mapped surge point.When this key is pressed, a dialog box appears requesting a specialpassword to proceed. The surge point is selected by placing thegreen box over the desired point. Then the REMOVE SURGE POINTkey is pressed to remove it.

Table 121: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME Screen.VSD Service Returns user to VSD Screen.ACC Details Service Returns user to ACC Screen.


Surge map screen - List view

Figure 44: Surge map screen - list view

The surge map can be shown in either Table (default) or List view as selected with the MAP VIEWkey.Shown above is the List view. In this view, the Delta P/P, Pre-Rotation Vanes position and VSDoutput frequency of each mapped point are listed. It is the same report that is generated whenthe surge map is printed to a printer. Therefore, this view cannot be selected while a print is inprogress. If the SURGE MAP key is pressed on the ACC DETAILS Screen while a print is in progress,the Map View is reset to Table if it is set to List.The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keypad keys are used to scroll to the previous or next list ofparameters.This screen is applicable to Variable Speed Drives (VSD) (with the Motor Communications ProtocolSetpoint set to Modbus; ACC Board is not present) and Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives(MVVSD).


Table 122: ProgrammableButton DescriptionMap View Allows the Service Technician to change the view from List to Table.

Page UpThis key scrolls the contents of the view window up to the previouslist of parameters. If the window cannot be scrolled up, this key willnot be displayed.

Page DownThis key scrolls the contents of the view window to the next list ofparameters. If the window cannot be scrolled down, this key is notdisplayed.


Table 123: NavigationButton DescriptionHome Returns user to HOME Screen.VSD Returns user to VSD Screen.ACC Details Returns user to ACC DETAILS Screen.


Harmonic filter details screen

Figure 45: Harmonic filter details screen

This screen displays more detailed information pertaining to the IEEE-519 Harmonic Filter.Table 124: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description








OperatingMode (Run /Stop)

– Indicates whether the Harmonic Filter is operating.

VSD Model Service Displays the horsepower for which the attached Harmonic Filter isconfigured.



DC BusVoltage – Displays the DC Bus voltage as measured by the Harmonic Filter.

SupplyContactor(LED)

– Indicates whether the output to the Supply Contactor is energized.

PrechargeContactor(LED)

– Indicates whether the output to the Precharge Contactor isenergized.

PhaseRotation – Displays the phase rotation detected by the Harmonic Filter (A, B, C

or C, B, A)Total SupplykVA – Displays the total supply Kilovolt-Amps measured by the Harmonic

Filter.

HeatsinkTemperature –

(Labeled Baseplate Temperatures on VSD with part number371-03789-xxx (503HP 60Hz; 419HP 50Hz). Displays the temperatureof the Harmonic Heatsink (baseplate).

Voltage Peak(N-L1, N-L2,N-L3)

– Displays the 3-phase peak voltages as measured by the HarmonicFilter (Neutral to Line).

RMS Voltage(L1-L2, L2-L3,L3-L1)

– Displays the 3-phase RMS Voltages across each line.

Voltage TotalHarmonicDistortion(L1, L2, L3)

– Displays the 3-phase voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)measurements.

RMS FilterCurrent (L1,L2, L3)

– Displays the 3-phase filter current values as measured by theHarmonic Filter.

SupplyCurrent TotalDemandDistortion(L1, L2, L3)

– Displays the 3-phase Current Total Demand Distortion (TDD)measurements.

RMS SupplyCurrent (L1,L2, L3)

– Displays the 3-phase RMS Voltages across each line.





PulldownDemandLimit

Operator


PulldownDemandTime




Motor lubrication screen

Figure 46: Motor lubrication screen

This feature provides an indication when the compressor motor lubrication is required. Thelubrication requirement and notification is based on the operating hours since last motorlubrication.There are up to three levels of notification, each indicating an increasing level of urgency:WARNING – MOTOR BEARING LUBE SUGGESTED is displayed when the hours exceed 1000 hours.If there is no response, WARNING – MOTOR BEARING LUBE REQUIRED is displayed when the hoursexceed 1200 hours.If there is still no response, a safety shutdown is performed when the hours exceed 1400 hours andMotor – Lack Of Bearing Lubrication is displayed.Refer to Display messages for details of these messages.To provide a record of when a motor lubrication is performed, the Operator enters his/her initials,name or user ID using the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key. The date and time of this entry isautomatically logged as the Date of Last Lubrication and Time of Last Lubrication. This also clearsany motor lubrication warning or safety that is in effect and resets the operating hours since lastlubrication to zero.This lubrication notification and shutdown feature can be enabled or disabled based on thecustomer’s preference using the AUTO LUBE and SHUTDOWN keys.


Table 127: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionDate of Last MotorLubrication Warning or Fault Displays the date of the last lubrication warning or safety shutdown.

Date of Last MotorLubrication

Displays the date of the last motor lubrication.

This parameter is automatically recorded when the Operatorenters his/her initials, name or user ID using the MOTOR LUBEACKNOWLEDGE key.

Time of Last MotorLubrication

Displays the time of the last motor lubrication.

This parameter is automatically recorded as above.

Operator Initials at LastMotor Lubrication

Displays the initials, name or user ID entered by the Operator whenthe motor lubrication is performed.

Entered as a 3 to 8 character string using the MOTOR LUBEACKNOWLEDGE key.

Operating Hours Since LastMotor Lubrication

Displays the run hours (in whole hours) accumulated since the lastmotor lubrication.

The value is reset to zero whenever the Operating hours (on theOPERATIONS Screen) is reset to zero or whenever the Operatorenters his/her initials, name or user ID as above.


Table 128: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionMotor LubeDate Admin Allows modification of the Date of Last Motor Lubrication.

Shutdown Service

If the Auto Lube Setpoint above is set to Disabled, the ShutdownSetpoint is used to enable or disable the safety shutdown thatoccurs at 1400 operating hours since last lubrication.

The safety shutdown can be enabled or disabled per the customer’spreference. If enabled, the safety shutdown will occur at the normal1400 hours. If disabled, a warning will be displayed but the safetyshutdown will not occur.

Motor LubeAcknowledge Operator

The operator must acknowledge the motor lubrication has beenperformed once it is complete. This is done by entering his/herinitials, name or user ID as a 3 to 8 character string*.

The entry is displayed as the Operator Initials at Last Lubrication.The date and time of this entry is automatically logged as the Dateof Last Motor Lubrication and Time of Last Motor Lubrication. Thisentry also resets the operating hours since last lubrication to zero.

This entry also resets the motor lubrication warning messages:WARNING – MOTOR BEARING LUBE SUGGESTED, WARNING –MOTOR BEARING LUBE REQUIRED and safety shutdown Motor –Lack Of Bearing Lubrication.

Auto Lube Service

This setpoint accommodates those chillers that are equippedwith the optional Automatic Motor Lubrication hardware thatautomatically lubricates the motor at regular intervals.

Since chillers equipped with this hardware don’t require manuallubrication, the lubrication warnings displayed at 1000, 1200 and1400 (safety shutdown) operating hours since last lubrication areunnecessary. Therefore, when the automatic lubrication hardwareis present, this setpoint must be enabled. With this setting, nolubrication warnings or safety shutdown will occur.

If disabled, as it should be when not equipped with the automaticlubrication hardware, the motor lubrication warnings and safetyshutdown will occur at the associated operating hours.

Note: *

Enter your initials, name or user ID using the following procedure. The entry must be aminimum of 3 characters and a maximum of 8 characters.

1. At the keypad, log in at OPERATOR access level using password 9 6 7 5. If resetting thesafety shutdown Motor – Lack Of Lubrication, place the Safety Stop Switch in the Stopposition.

2. Press the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen. Adialog box appears. A red box highlights the first changeable location.


3. Use the ▲▼ keys to scroll sequentially through the alphabet to enter letters or numbers.Each time the ▲ is pressed, the next higher sequential alphabet letter or number isdisplayed. Each time the ▼ is pressed, the next lower alphabet letter or number isdisplayed. When the desired letter or number is displayed, use the ► key to forwardspace the red box for the next entry. Use the ◄ key to backspace, if necessary. To writeover an existing entry or to place a blank space, scroll to the beginning of the alphabet.The selection prior to the letter A is a blank space. Use the ● key to enter a period/decimal point. During the entry process, if it is desired to exit the dialog box and retainthe previous entry, press the CANCEL (X) key.When all of the desired characters have been entered, press the Enter key.

4. After the lubrication has been completed and the Motor Lube Acknowledged rotate thethe Safety Stop clockwise to reset it to the normal position.

Table 129: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Motor View Returns user to MOTOR Screen.


Motor details screen

Figure 47: Motor details screen

This screen displays information pertinent to the Motor Monitoring feature. The feature consistsof motor winding temperature, motor bearing temperature, motor bearing vibration and motorcooling coil leak detection. Setpoints on this screen allow any combination of these items to beenabled or disabled based on the equipment applied. The motor could be equipped with differenttypes of sensors for this monitoring. Either RTD's or Transmitters could be applied for winding andbearing temperature monitoring. Motor cooling coil leak detection could be done with either anoptical or float sensor. Setpoints on this screen allow for the enabling of the actual sensor typeapplied.Vibration baseline data can be entered manually or by running an auto baseline routine that plots abaseline over a 1 hour period while the chiller is running.This screen also serves as a gateway to a subscreen that allows programming of the windingHigh Temperature Warning/Safety Shutdown thresholds and bearing High Temperature and HighVibration Warning/Safety Shutdowns. Also, individual winding temperature sensors can be disabledon this screen.Table 130: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Motor Run (LED) Illuminates when the OptiView Control Center is commanding themotor to run.

%Full Load Amps Displays the motor current as a percentage of chiller Full LoadAmps.

Output FrequencyOnly displayed when Motor Drive Type Setpoint is set to any VSD.Displays the frequency at which the VSD is operating the motor. Thisvalue is returned from the VSD Logic Board.



Pre-Rotation Vanes PositionIf equipped with a Pro-rotation Vanes potentiometer, displays thepresent Pre-Rotation Vanes position as a value between 0% (closed)and 100% (full open).

Motor Windings

Temperature

Displays the enabled Motor Winding Temperatures for phase A, Band C. The setting of the Winding Temperature Protection Setpointaffects this display as follows: When winding RTD's are enabled,there are 2 temperatures per phase displayed (otherwise, thereis only 1 per phase). When set to Disabled, no temperatures aredisplayed and the heading, text and data boxes do not appear.Individual temperatures can be disabled using the TemperatureDisable Setpoint (on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen). When anindividual temperature is disabled, the temperature data boxdoes not appear. Any RTD input that registers as an open RTD isconsidered invalid and displays as XXX.X.

Average WindingTemperature

This value is calculated as the average of all enabled and valid MotorWinding Temperatures. Any winding temperature that registers asopen, out of range or disabled is not used in the calculation. WhenRTD's are used for winding temperature measurement, there are amaximum of 6 temperatures used to calculate the average. Whentransmitters are used, there are a maximum of 3 temperatures usedto calculate the average. The text description and data box do notappear when the Winding Temperature Protection Setpoint is set todisabled.

Motor Cooling Coil LeakDetected (LED)

Illuminates when the enabled Motor Cooling Coil Leak Detector(refer to Motor Cooling Coil Leak Protection in Table 131) indicates aleak. The LED and text description do not appear when the MotorCooling Coil Leak Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled.

Motor Bearings

Temperature

Displays the enabled Shaft End and Opposite End motor bearingtemperatures. Any RTD input that registers as an open RTD,is considered invalid and displays as XXX.X. When the BearingTemperature Protection Setpoint is set to Disable, no temperaturesare displayed and the heading, text and data boxes do not appear.



Vibration

Displays the Shaft End and Opposite End vibration values. Thevibration values are not in any particular units of measure. They arerelative values. The larger the number, the greater the magnitudeof vibration represented. When the Motor Vibration ProtectionSetpoint is set to Disabled, no vibration values are displayed and theheading, text and data boxes do not appear.

Auto Baseline Time Left Only appears when the auto baseline routine is running. Displaysthe time remaining in the 1 hour auto baseline routine.

Vibration Baseline

Displays the Shaft End and Opposite End vibration valuesestablished during the running of the auto baseline routine usingthe AUTO BASELINE key or by manual entry using the MANUALBASELINE key. The vibration values are not in any particular unitsof measure. They are relative values. The larger the number, thegreater the magnitude of vibration represented. These values alsocreate the High Vibration Shutdown and High Vibration Warningthresholds as follows: (NOTE: if the calculated value exceeds theminimum and maximum limits of the Shutdown (2.0 to 30.0) orWarning (1.0 to 15.0) threshold, the threshold is set to the respectiveupper or lower limit):

• Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Shaft End VibrationBaseline X2

• Shaft End High Vibration Warning Default - Shaft EndVibration Baseline X2

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Opposite EndVibration Baseline X2

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning Default - OppositeEnd Vibration Baseline X2

• Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown - Shaft End VibrationBaseline X3

• Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Default - Shaft EndVibration Baseline X3

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown - Opposite ShaftEnd Vibration Baseline X3

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Default -Opposite Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3

These automatically derived values can be overridden by manuallyentering a threshold on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen using theVIBRATION SETUP key.If no baseline values are entered, by either the auto baseline routineor manual entry, the message WARNING – MOTOR – BEARINGVIBRATION BASELINE NOT SET is displayed and the baseline valuesare set to X.X while this message is displayed. When the MotorVibration Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled, no baseline vibrationvalues are displayed and the heading, text and data boxes do notappear.



WindingTemperatureProtection

Service

Enables the type of temperature sensing device being used to sensemotor winding temperature. When set to any setting other thanDisabled, the respective temperatures are enabled, displayed andthe HIGH WINDING TEMPERATURE Fault and Warning will occurwhen the programmed thresholds for those conditions are reached.The settings are:

• DISABLED - Disables the Winding Temperature feature. Nowinding temperatures are displayed and the heading, text anddata boxes do not appear. The High Winding TemperatureFault and Warning will not occur. This setting is used when themotor is not equipped with winding temperature sensors orif is desired to disable the feature for service reasons. This isthe default setting. The winding displays can be individuallydisabled using the Temperature Disable Setpoint (ADMINaccess level) on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen.

• RTD - Enables and displays the 6 (2 per phase) Motor WindingTemperatures, as reported by the winding RTD's, via theMotor Monitoring Board serial communications.

• TRANSMITTER - Enables and displays the 3 Motor WindingTemperatures, as reported by the winding transmitters via theMotor Monitoring Board serial communications.

• VSD TRANSMITTER - Enables and displays the 3 MotorWinding Temperatures, as reported by the windingtransmitters via the VSD Logic Board serial communications.

BearingTemperatureProtection

Service

Enables the type of temperature sensing device being used to sensemotor bearing temperature. When set to any setting other thanDisabled, the respective temperatures are enabled, displayed andthe HIGH BEARING TEMPERATURE Fault and Warning will occurwhen the programmed thresholds for those conditions are reached.The settings are:

• DISABLED - Disables the Bearing Temperature feature. Nobearing temperatures are displayed and the heading, textand data boxes do not appear. The High Bearing TemperatureFault and Warning will not occur. This setting is when if themotor is not equipped with bearing temperature sensors or ifis desired to disable the feature for service reasons. This is thedefault setting.

• RTD - Enables and displays the 2 motor bearing temperatures,as reported by the bearing RTD's, via the Motor MonitoringBoard serial communications.

• VSD TRANSMITTER - Enables and displays the 2 motor bearingtemperatures, as reported by the bearing transmitters via theVSD Logic Board serial communications.



MotorVibrationProtection

Service

Enables and disables the Motor Bearing Vibration protectionfeature. When set to any setting other than Disabled, the respectivevibration values are enabled, displayed and the HIGH BEARINGVIBRATION fault and Warnings will occur when the programmedthresholds for those conditions are reached. The settings are:

• DISABLED - Disables the Bearing Vibration Protectionfeature. No bearing vibration values are displayed and theheading, text and data boxes do not appear. The High BearingVibration Fault, Warning and Baseline Not Set Warning will notoccur. This setting is used when the motor is not equippedwith bearing vibration sensors or if is desired to disable thefeature for service reasons. This is the default setting.

• ROLLING ELEMENT - Enables and displays the BearingVibration Protection feature. Displays the Shaft End andOpposite Shaft End vibration values as reported by thevibration sensors via the Motor Monitoring Board serialcommunications. The Vibration Baseline values, createdby either manual entry or by running the auto baselineroutine are shown, along with the AUTO BASELINE and AUTOBASELINE SETPOINT keys.



MotorCoolingCoil LeakProtection

Service

Enables the type of leak protection device being used to detect aleak of the motor cooling coil. When set to any setting other thanDisabled, an LED status indicator is displayed and the Motor CoolingCoil safety fault will occur when the sensor indicates a leak. Thesettings are:

• DISABLED - Disables the Motor Cooling Coil Leak Protectionfeature. The status LED and text do not appear. The MotorCooling Coil Leak fault will not occur. This setting is usedwhen the motor is not equipped with a leak detector or if it isdesired to disable this feature for service reasons. This is thedefault setting.

• OPTICAL - Enables the optical sensor digital input and displaysthe leak status, as reported by the optical leak sensor, via theMotor Monitoring Board serial communications.

• FLOAT - Enables the float sensor digital input and displays theleak status, as reported by the float leak sensor, via the MotorMonitoring Board serial communications.

ManualBaseline(MotorBearingVibration)

Service

Used to manually enter a vibration baseline value (0.1 to 5; default2) for the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft End bearings. The vibrationvalues are not in any particular units of measure. They are relativevalues. The larger the number, the greater the magnitude ofvibration represented. Values entered appear on this screen as theVibration Baseline values. A special password is required.

AutoBaseline(MotorBearingVibration)

Service

Used to run the auto baseline routine. Only allowed after thechiller has been running for greater than 2 minutes. The vibrationlevel of each bearing is independently averaged for 1 hour at 1minute intervals while the chiller is running. While the routine isrunning, the time remaining in the 1 hour routine is displayed asauto baseline time left on this screen. At the completion of theroutine, the derived values appear on the screen as the VibrationBaseline values (0.1 - 5; default 2). The vibration values are not inany particular units of measure. They are relative values. The largerthe number, the greater the magnitude of vibration represented. Aspecial password is required.

Table 132: NavigationButton Access Level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME screenMotor View Returns user to MOTOR screen

Setpoints Service Moves to a subscreen allowing programming of additional motormonitoring setpoints


Motor setpoints screen

Figure 48: Motor setpoints screen

This screen allows programming of the winding and bearing High Temperature Warning/SafetyShutdown thresholds and the High Vibration Warning/Safety Shutdown thresholds, along with thevibration input gain. Also, individual winding temperature sensors can be disabled on this screen.Table 133: Display only - Motor windingsField/LED name Description

Temperature

Displays the Enabled/Disabled status of each winding sensor. TheTEMPERATURE DISABLE Setpoint key can be used to enable ordisable individual winding temperature sensors. Not shown whenWinding Temperature Protection Setpoint on the MOTOR DETAILSScreen is set to Disabled.

High Winding TemperatureShutdown

Displays the High Winding Temperature safety shutdown threshold,as programmed with the WINDING SETUP Setpoint key. Not shownwhen Winding Temperature Protection Setpoint on the MOTORDETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.

Winding Hotspot AllowanceDisplays the Winding Hotspot Allowance temperature. Not shownwhen Winding Temperature Protection Setpoint on the MOTORDETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.


Table 134: Display only - Motor bearingsField/LED name Description

High Vibration Shutdown

Displays the High Vibration safety shutdown threshold for the ShaftEnd and Opposite Shaft End bearings. Not shown when the MotorVibration Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set toDisabled. The threshold used for this setpoint will either be thevalues entered by the Vibration Setup Setpoint or values derivedfrom the Vibration Baseline Setpoints (refer to Vibration Setup in Table 135). Also displayed is the Delay, which is the amount oftime the vibration must exceed the shutdown threshold before theshutdown occurs.

High Vibration Warning

Displays the High Vibration Warning threshold for the Shaft End andOpposite Shaft End bearings. Not shown when the Motor VibrationProtection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.The threshold used for this setpoint will either be the values enteredby the Vibration Setup Setpoint or values derived from the VibrationBaseline Setpoints (refer to Vibration Setup in Table 135). Alsodisplayed is the Delay, which is the amount of time the vibrationmust exceed the warning threshold before the warning is displayed.

Vibration Input GainDisplays the Vibration Input Gain value, as programmed with theVIBRATION GAIN Setpoint key. Not shown when the Motor VibrationProtection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.

High Bearing TemperatureShutdown

Displays the High Bearing Temperature safety shutdown threshold,as programmed with the BEARING SETUP Setpoint key. Not shownwhen Bearing Temperature Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILSScreen is set to Disabled.

High Bearing TemperatureWarning

Displays the High Bearing Temperature warning threshold, asprogrammed with the BEARING SETUP Setpoint key. Not shownwhen Bearing Temperature Protection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILSScreen is set to Disabled.



WindingSetup Service

Not shown when Winding Temperature Protection Setpointon MOTOR DETAILS Screen is set to Disabled. Allows a ServiceTechnician to program the High Winding Temperature (266 to 320°F;default 311) and Winding Hotspot Allowance (0 to 18°F; default 0)safety shutdown thresholds. Values entered are displayed in therespective data boxes.

VibrationGain Admin

Only shown when access level is ADMIN and Motor VibrationProtection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is not set toDisabled. Allows a Service Technician to enter values for vibrationInput Gain [1:1, 11:1, 21:1 (default)].

TemperatureDisable Admin

Only shown when access level is ADMIN and Winding TemperatureProtection Setpoint on MOTOR DETAILS Screen is not set toDisabled. Allows a Service Technician to disable individual windingtemperature sensors. The respective temperature data box reflectsenabled or disabled status. This could be applied to defectivesensors or for service reasons. When a sensor is disabled, therespective temperature data box does not appear on the MOTORDETAILS Screen.

VibrationSetup Service

Not shown when Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint on MOTORDETAILS Screen is set to Disabled.

Allows a Service Technician to program the High Vibration Shutdown(2.0 to 30; default Baseline X3) and WARNING (1.0 to 15; defaultBaseline X2) thresholds for the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft Endbearings, along with the desired delays (shutdown - 0 to 30 seconds,default 15; WARNING - 0 to 120 seconds; default 30). The vibrationthresholds are not in any particular units of measure. They arerelative values. The larger the number, the greater the magnitude ofvibration represented.

The thresholds used for Shutdown and warning will be eitherthe values entered by this Vibration Setup Setpoint or valuesderived from the Vibration Baseline Setpoints. The values used bythe software depend upon the sequence in which the setpointsare entered. If Vibration Baseline values are established (on theMOTOR DETAILS Screen with either the MANUAL BASELINE keyor the AUTO BASELINE key) after thresholds have been enteredwith the Vibration Setup Setpoint, the baseline derived Shutdownand Warning thresholds override the thresholds entered with theVibration Setup Setpoint. Thresholds entered with this VibrationSetup Setpoint, after baseline derived Shutdown and Warningthresholds are entered, override Baseline derived values. The activethreshold values are displayed in the Motor Bearings High VibrationShutdown and High Vibration Warning data boxes on this screen.



The Vibration Baseline values from which the Vibration Shutdownand Warning thresholds are derived, are displayed on the MOTORDETAILS Screen. The thresholds are calculated from the Baselinevalues as follows: (NOTE: if the calculated value exceeds theminimum and maximum limits of the Shutdown (2.0 to 30.0) orWarning (1.0 to 15.0) threshold, the threshold is set to the respectiveupper or lower limit).

• Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Shaft End VibrationBaseline X2

• Shaft End High Vibration Warning Default - Shaft EndVibration Baseline X2

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning - Opposite EndVibration Baseline X2

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Warning Default - OppositeEnd Vibration Baseline X2

• Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown - Shaft End VibrationBaseline X3

• Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Default - Shaft EndVibration Baseline X3

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown - Opposite ShaftEnd Vibration Baseline X3

• Opposite Shaft End High Vibration Shutdown Default -Opposite Shaft End Vibration Baseline X3

If no baseline values are entered, by either the auto baseline routineor manual entry, the message WARNING – MOTOR – BEARINGVIBRATION BASELINE NOT SET is displayed and the baseline valuesare set to X.X while this message is displayed. When the MotorVibration Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled, no baseline vibrationvalues are displayed and the heading, text and data boxes do notappear.

Table 136: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME screen.Motor details Service Returns user to Motor Details screen.


Setpoints screen

Figure 49: Setpoints screen

This screen provides a convenient location for programming the most common setpoints involvedin the chiller control. This screen also serves as a gateway to a subscreen for defining the setup ofgeneral system parameters.Table 137: Display onlyButton Description

Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature – Setpoint

Displays the present setpoint to which the chiller is operatingwhether controlled remotely or locally. This value could come froma 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input in AnalogRemote mode, PWM signal in Digital Remote mode, E-Link or SC-EQ communications interface in ISN mode, or a locally programmedvalue.

Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Cycling –Shutdown

Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at which thechiller will shut down to avoid over-cooling the building.Thisvalue is calculated by subtracting the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Cycling Offset – Shutdown from the Leaving ChilledLiquid Temperature – Setpoint. If the value is below the absoluteminimum allowed shutdown temperature, the minimum value isdisplayed.


Table 137: Display onlyButton Description

Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Cycling –Restart

Displays the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at which the chillerwill restart after it has shut down due to over-cooling temperature.This value is calculated by adding the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Cycling Offset – Restart to the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature – Setpoint.


Displays the active Current Limit Setpoint.

In Local mode, this is the locally programmed Current LimitSetpoint. In ISN Remote mode, this is the setpoint received from theE-Link or SC-EQ communications interface. In Analog Remote mode,this is the setpoint received via 0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mAor 4 to 20mA input. In Digital Remote mode, this is the Pulse widthModulation signal input.


PulldownDemandLimit

Operator

Allows the user to specify the current limit value (as a percentageof Full Load Amps) to which the chiller will be limited during thespecified pulldown limit time. Adjustable from 30% to 100%, Default= 100%. This value will override the Motor Current Limit value duringthis time period. This function is used to provide energy savingsfollowing chiller start-up.

PulldownDemandTime


Print View Generates setpoints print report.


Allows the user to specify the maximum allowed motor current (asa percentage of FLA). Adjustable from 30% to 100%, Default = 100%.When the motor current reaches this value, the Pre-Rotation Vaneswill not be permitted to open further. If the motor current risesabove this value, the Pre-Rotation Vanes will close to reduce thecurrent to this value.

Local LeavingChilled LiquidTemperature– Range

Operator

This is the range over which an analog signal (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20mA,0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in Analog Remote mode or a digitalsignal (PWM) in Digital Remote mode can reset the Leaving ChilledLiquid Temperature Setpoint above the operator programmed BASESetpoint.

Programmable from 10°F to 40°F, with a default of 10°F, it is addedto the BASE value to create a range over which the remote devicecan reset the setpoint. For example, if this setpoint is programmedfor 10°F and the operator programmed value is 45°F, then theremote device can set the Leaving Chilled Liquid TemperatureSetpoint over the range of 45.0°F to 55.0°F.



Local LeavingChilled LiquidTemperature– Setpoint

Operator

This value allows the user to define the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature that is to be maintained by the chiller.

It is programmable over the range of 38.0°F to 72.0°F (water) or10.0°F to 72.0°F (brine). If Smart Freeze is enabled, the range is36.0°F to 70.0°F (water). A remote device can provide an analogsignal (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20mA, 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC) in AnalogRemote mode, or PWM signal in Digital Remote mode that changesthe setpoint by creating an offset above the operator programmedBASE Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. This offset maybe defined from to 10.0°F to 40.0°F above the BASE Setpoint (referto the Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint Rangedescription). Additionally, E-Link or SC-EQ communications (in ISNRemote mode) can define the setpoint through a serial data stream.In this case, the incoming setpoint is not an offset that is appliedto the locally programmed BASE Setpoint value, but rather is thesetpoint value itself.

LeavingChilled LiquidTemperatureCyclingOffset –Shutdown

Operator

This value allows the user to specify the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature at which the chiller will shut down on a LEAVINGCHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown. Thisis done by defining an offset below the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint. It is programmable over a range of 1°F to70°F below the setpoint, to a minimum cutout of 36°F (water), 34°F(water with Smart Freeze enabled) or 6°F (brine). It establishesthe minimum allowed temperature for the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature and prevents over-cooling of the building. Anytimethe Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint is increased, theshutdown threshold is 36.0°F (water) or 6.0°F (brine) for the nextten (10) minutes. If Smart Freeze is enabled, the threshold is 34.0°Ffor the next 10 minutes. After ten (10) minutes have elapsed, theshutdown threshold becomes the programmed setpoint value.

LeavingChilled LiquidTemperatureCyclingOffset –Restart

Operator

This value allows the user to specify the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature at which the chiller will restart after a shutdown on aLEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown.This is done by defining an offset above the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint. It is programmable over a range of 0°F to(80 - Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Setpoint). This allows amaximum restart value of 80°F. The chiller will automatically restartwhen this temperature is reached. This setpoint can be used toreduce chiller cycling by delaying the chiller restart until the coolingload has increased.

RemoteAnalog InputRange

Operator

This setpoint defines, for the Control Center, the remote signalrange applied for remote reset of the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint and Current Limit Setpoint in Analog Remotemode. If the remote signal is 0 to 10VDC or 0 to 20mA, this setpointmust be programmed for 0 to 10VDC. If the remote signal is 2 to10VDC or 4 to 20mA, this setpoint must be programmed for 2 to10VDC.



Setup View Moves to the subscreen allowing setup of general systemparameters.

Quick start

Admin -to initiallyenable thefeature

Service - iffeature isenabled

Moves to the subscreen allowing the Quick Start feature to beenabled/disabled. Once enabled, this screen allows programmingand viewing of Quick Start setpoints and parameters. This feature isonly available on LVVSD and MVVSD.


Setup screen

Figure 50: Setup screen

This screen is the top level of the general configuration parameters. It allows programming ofthe time and date, along with specifications as to how the time will be displayed (12 or 24 hourformat). In addition, the chiller configuration, as determined by the state of the MicroboardProgram Jumpers and Program Switches is displayed. A qualified Service Technician establishes thisconfiguration per the desired operation. This screen also serves as a gateway to more subscreensfor defining general system parameters.Table 140: Display only

031-02430-001 and 031-03630-007 Microboard

Refrigerant selection

Displays R134a based upon the position ofSW1-2.

On = R-134A

Off = R-22

Liquid type

Displays Water or Brine based upon the positionof SW1-1.

On = Brine

Off = Water



Clock(Enabled/Disabled)

Operator

Allows the user to enable or disable the Real Time Clock inorder to conserve battery life. The clock will be disabled duringmanufacturing and must be enabled at system commissioning. Inaddition, when preparing for prolonged shutdown the clock shouldonce again be disabled. With the 031-03630-007 microboard thissetting may be changed but has no effect. The battery in the 03630microboard will last for over 10 years.

Present Time Operator

Allows the user to specify the present time. This value is criticalto logging system shutdowns accurately and for utilizing thescheduling capabilities. When prompted to enter a time value, theuser must enter the hour and minute desired (using leading zeroesas necessary). If the chiller is presently set to 24-hour mode, thetime must be entered in the 24-hour format. Otherwise, the usermust also select AM or PM for the entered time. If out of range, theuser is prompted for the information again. At this point the usermay retry the time entry, or cancel the programming attempt.

Present Date Operator

Allows the user to specify the present date. This value is criticalto logging system shutdowns accurately and for utilizing thescheduling capabilities. When prompted to enter a date value, theuser must enter the day, month, and four-digit year (using leadingzeroes as necessary). If within range, the value will be accepted. Ifout of range, the user is prompted for the information again. At thispoint the user may retry the date entry, or cancel the programmingattempt.

12/24 Hr Operator

Allows the user to specify the format in which the time will bepresented to the user. This setpoint will affect the display of thetime on the chiller panel and on all reports generated. 12-hour timeformat will include the AM and PM modifiers and show the rangeof time between 1:00 and 12:59, while the 24-hour time format willshow the range of time between 0:00 and 23:59.

ChangeSettings

Operator orhigher

Used to enter the following setpoints. Pressing this key placesa green selection box around the first changeable setpoint. Theaccess level determines which setpoints can be changed. Use the ▲and ▼ keys to place the selection box around the desired setpoint.With the setpoint selected, press the Enter key. A dialog box appearswith the range of settings.

ChilledLiquid PumpOperation

ServiceAllows a Service Technician to select Chilled Liquid Pump controlcontacts (I/O Board TB2-44/45) operation as either standard orenhanced.



PRV Position Service

This setpoint allows the software to be used in all YK-EP chillers,whether equipped with the potentiometer or not. The PRV positionwill be shown on respective screens when Enabled.

• Enabled – Automatically set to this setting if Hot Gas Bypassor Variable Geometry Diffuser (VGD) is enabled on theOPERATIONS Screen or Motor Drive Type Setpoint is set toVSD or MVVSD. It is connected to the Microboard J7.

• Disabled – Set to this position when not equipped with a PRVpotentiometer. If equipped with a VSD, MVVSD or the Hot GasBypass, or Variable Geometry Diffuser is enabled; this setpointis automatically enabled and cannot be set to disabled.

Motor DriveType Service

Allows a Service Technician to enter the applied compressor motortype as either Electro-Mechanical (EM), Solid State Starter (SSS-ModA), Solid State starter (SSS – Mod B), Variable Speed Drive-60 HzVariable Speed Drive-50 Hz, MVVSD or MVSSS.

Anti-Recycle Service Allows a Service Technician to enable or disable the anti-recycletimer for test purposes only.

HeadPressureControl

Service Allows the Service Technician to enable or disable the Head PressureControl feature.

HeatRecovery Service Allows the Service Technician to enable or disable the Heat Recovery

feature.Power FailureRestart Operator Allows the user to select Manual or Automatic restart after power

failure.

Coastdown Service

Allows a Service Technician to select either Standard (electricmotor) or Enhanced (15 minutes–Steam Turbine applications).When Standard is selected, the duration is programmable using theCoastdown Time Setpoint between 240 and 900 seconds.

MotorMonitoring Service Allows the Service Technician to enable or disable the Motor

Monitoring feature.

Pre-Run Service Allows Service Technician to select either Standard (30 seconds) orExtended (180 seconds).

Oil PumpPackage Service Allows Service Technician to enter the applied oil pump drive type as

either Variable Speed or Fixed Speed.YK-EPControl Service Allows selection of YK-EP program functions.

LineFrequency Service Sets the Line Frequency to either 60 Hz or 50 Hz as appropriate.

Motor Heater Service Set to Enabled if motor heaters installed else, set to Disabled.



MotorComm.Protocol Service

VSD and MVVSD applications – Should be set to Modbus.

Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter and MVSSS applications –Should be set to Modbus.

Only displayed when Motor Drive Type Setpoint above is selectedas “VSD-60 Hz”, “VSD-50 Hz”, “MVVSD”, “SSS-Mod B”or “MV SSS”.Allows the Service Technician to enable the appropriate serialcommunications port for communications with the Solid StateStarter (SSS) or Variable Speed Drive (VSD). The chiller must bestopped with the Start-Run-Stop/Reset switch in the Stop/Resetposition to change this setpoint.

CoastdownTime Service

Only displayed when Standard is selected as the CoastdownSetpoint. Allows Service Technician to select appropriate coastdowntime for compressor motor applied. Larger motors require alonger coastdown time to assure the motor rotation has stoppedbefore the oil pump is turned off at completion of post-lube.Programmable range is determined by the Chiller Style/CompressorSetpoint (Style F/J7 and G/K6-K7, the range is 240 (default) to 900seconds. All others, the range is 150 (default) to 900 seconds).

CondenserTemperatureRange

Service

Special order R134a chillers are allowed to operate at higher thanstandard condenser temperatures. The resulting higher operatingpressures require higher condenser warning and safety shutdownthresholds than standard applications. These chillers are equippedwith a special High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO) that can be set totrip at a higher pressure.

This setpoint allows for either standard or higher temperaturecondenser temperature operation. It is set to Extended for thosechillers equipped for high condenser temperature operation.Otherwise, it is set to Standard. For R134a chillers, refer to Table 142.

Motor AutoLube Type Service

Set to None, QLS401, P203 or Sleeve as applicable:• None - User must manually lubricate the motor bearings.• QLS401 - Injects grease at the interval factory set in the

QLS401 system.• P203 - The OptiView panel controls the lubrication time

interval and also monitors the grease level.• Sleeve - Motors with sleeve bearings use a lubricating oil

which extends the time interval for bearing lubrication.

Table 142: Condenser temperature rangeSetpoint Standard ExtendedWarning – High Pressure Limit – Maximum allowable value (PSIG) 162.5 193Condenser – High Pressure – Trip/reset threshold (PSIG) 180/120 200/140Condenser – High Pressure Stopped – Trip/reset threshold (PSIG) 160/160 170/170



Schedule View Moves to the subscreen allowing definition of the chiller operationschedule.

User View Moves to the subscreen allowing configuration of user preferences.

Comms View Moves to the subscreen allowing configuration of systemcommunications.

Printer View Moves to the subscreen allowing configuration and control ofprinter functions.

Sales order View Moves to the subscreen displaying the Sales Order information forthe chiller system.

Operations View Moves to the subscreen displaying operating parameters of thechiller system.

Diagnostics Service Moves to the subscreen allowing limited diagnostic capability whileoperating.


Quick start screen

Figure 51: Quick start screen

The Quick Start feature is useful in data center and process control applications where it isdesirable to re-establish cooling as fast as possible after a shutdown or power failure. This feature,when enabled, allows quicker starts and restarts than normal control. It does this by reducingthe time cycle for chiller restart and once running, loading the chiller as fast as possible. After thechiller is running and has met a specified setpoint or a specified period of time has elapsed, controlreturns to normal.Quick Start feature has two different start modes:

• Quick Restart – When the chiller shuts down, if certain conditions are met at the completionof coastdown (and within 30 seconds thereafter), the VSD is started immediately with noprelube. The vanes are given a constant open pulse and after the VSD achieves its startfrequency, the speed ramp rate is faster than with normal control.

• Quick Normal Start – If the conditions for a Quick Restart are not met, the next time thechiller is started, it has a prelube period just like a normal start, however the vanes will beginto open at the beginning of prelube, instead of waiting until System Run. At the completionof prelube, the VSD is started and after the VSD achieves its Start Frequency, the speed ramprate is faster than with normal control.

In order to use this feature, the chiller must be equipped with a Variable Speed Drive in ModbusProtocol Configuration or a Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive. The low inrush current of a VSDallows more starts per hour and allows the chiller to start with a more open vane position. It mustbe enabled on the Setpoints Screen with an ADMIN password by a qualified Service Technician.Once enabled, all setpoints and parameters related to this feature are displayed on this screen,when logged in at SERVICE access level.


Table 144: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionLeaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Displays the temperature of the liquid as it leaves the evaporator.

Leaving Chilled ActiveSetpoint

Displays the setpoint to which the Leaving Chilled Liquid is beingcontrolled.

Quick Pulldown in Effect(LED)

Illuminates while a Quick Pulldown is in effect. This is in effect froma start initiate until the Quick Pulldown Setpoint Offset has beenreached or the Pulldown Override Time has elapsed, whicheveroccurs first.



ChangeSetpoints Service

Used to enter the following setpoints.

Pressing this key places a green selection box around the firstchangeable setpoint. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to place the selectionbox around the desired setpoint. With the setpoint selected, pressthe Enter key. A dialog box appears with the range of settings.

MappingEnable Service

This is the same setpoint as shown on the ACC DETAILS Screen.

It can be programmed on either the ACC Screen or the QUICKSTART Screen. It sets the Delta T needed to be met to enable surgemapping and speed reduction initially on startup. (0.5°F to 4.0°F;default 1.0°F)

PulldownOverrideTime

Service

This setpoint is the length of time the PRV is held open (QuickRestart) and the ACC speed (Quick Restart and Quick Normal Start)is increased on startup if the Quick Pulldown Setpoint Offset is notreached.

This could be due to hitting current limit during the pulldown. Ifthe Quick Pulldown Setpoint Offset is not reached in the PulldownOverride Time, PRV and ACC speed control will revert back to normalautomatic control. (0 min to 15 min; default 10 min)

VSD StartFrequency Service

The VSD Start Frequency is as follows:• 60 Hz units with quick start enabled equal 30 Hz to 45 Hz

(default 45 Hz)• 50 Hz units equal 25 Hz to 37.5 Hz (default 37.5 Hz)

This setpoint is the same as shown on the ACC DETAILS Screen. Itcan be programmed on either the ACC Screen or the QUICK STARTScreen. It sets the VSD Start Frequency from which the speed willramp from.



Quick RampCurrentThreshold

Service

This setpoint sets the motor current threshold where the VSD speedcommand ramp rate changes. At or below this threshold the speedcommand ramp is 4X of standard control. Over this threshold, theramp rate is 2X of standard control until it hits the standard currentlimiting over 80% FLA. Higher current thresholds can result in fasterpulldown times. However, setting this value too high can result inslower pulldown times due to hitting the current limit sooner onpulldown. (20% to 80% FLA; default 50%)

QuickPulldownSetpointOffset

Service

This setpoint sets the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature at whichthe control transitions from Quick Start mode to normal operation.It is entered in the form of an offset above the active Leaving ChilledLiquid Temperature (LCHLT) Setpoint. Once the Leaving ChilledLiquid Temperature falls below the Active LCHLT Setpoint plus QuickPulldown Setpoint Offset, PRV (Quick Restart) and speed control(Quick Restart and Quick Normal Start) revert to normal automaticcontrol. Lower values of this offset result in faster pulldown timesbut can result in overshoot of the LCHLT Setpoint. Setting the valueto its minimum of 0 results in the fastest pulldown time but nearlyalways results in setpoint overshoot. Depending upon how close theLow Chilled Liquid Temperature shutdown threshold is to the LCHLTSetpoint, this could result in a LOW CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATUREcycling shutdown. (0°F to 10°F; default 5°F).

The Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature and setpoint is shown onthe QUICK START Screen for reference. This setpoint sets one ofthe two setpoints that determine when the control transitions fromQuick Start mode to normal operation. The other is the PulldownOverride Time below.

Quick StartMode Admin

This setpoint is used to Enable and Disable the Quick Start feature.It can only be Enabled when the Motor Drive Type Setpoint is setto VSD or MVVSD and the Motor Communications Protocol is set toModbus.

The default is Disabled. Quick Start can only be enabled using anADMIN password. When logged in at ADMIN access level, a QUICKSTART key will appear on the SETPOINTS Screen. Pressing this keywill navigate to the QUICK START Screen where this setpoint is usedto enable/disable the feature.

Quick Start can be Disabled when logged in at SERVICE access level.However, once Disabled, it requires an ADMIN password to enableit again, as explained above. Quick Start mode will be automaticallydisabled when any of the following occur: The Motor Drive Typeis changed to something other than VSD or MVVSD, or the MotorCommunications Protocol is changed to YORK.


Table 146: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME screen.Setpoints Service Returns user to SETPOINTS screen.


Schedule screen

Figure 52: Schedule screen

The SCHEDULE Screen contains more programmable values than a normal display screen. As such,each programmable value is not linked to a specific button. Instead the SELECT key is used toenable the cursor arrows which are used to highlight the day and the start or stop time the userwishes to modify. At this point the user may press the Enter key to program the Start/Stop times forthat day.In order for the Start/Stop combination to be utilized, each Start time must have a correspondingStop time which occurs later in the day. The presently programmed schedule for a given day canbe cancelled by setting both the Start time and Stop time to 12:00 AM. If the Start time equals theStop time (with any time other than 12:00 AM), the chiller is OFF for that day. If the user desires thechiller to operate continuously through several days, the Stop time of Day 1 can be set to 11:59 PMand the Start time of Day 2 can be set to 12:00 AM. The chiller will not stop but continue to operateuntil the stop of Day 2.The user has the ability to define a standard set of Start/Stop times which are utilized every week.The user may then specify exception Start/Stop combinations for any day of the week up to 6 weeksin advance. At the end of each week the schedule for the next week is created by combining thestandard week definition and the next defined exception week. The schedule is then updated aseach of the exception weeks shifts down, leaving a new, blank exception week in the 6th week slot.Table 147: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

None –



StandardWeek Start/Stop Times

Operator

For each day of the week, the user may specify a time for the chillerto start and a time for the chiller to stop. The times specified inthis entry week will be used as the default for every week of chilleroperation.

ExceptionStart/StopTimes

Operator

For each day of the week, the user may specify a time for thechiller to start and a time for the chiller to stop. These Start/Stopcombinations may be scheduled up to five (5) weeks in advanceand also for the present week. As each week goes by, the newschedule will be created for the present week using the Exceptionspecification in combination with the Standard week definition, asdescribed above.

Schedule(Enabled/Disabled)

Operator Allows the user to enable or disable the monitoring function whichenforces the scheduled starting and stopping of the chiller.

RepeatSundaySchedule

Operator Duplicates the schedule defined for Sunday for the remainder of thestandard weekdays.

Reset AllExceptionDays

Operator Deletes all programming for exception days within the next 6 weeks.

Select OperatorPlaces a selection box around a start time for a given day. Use ◄ ,► , ▲ or ▼ cursor arrows to place the box around the desired startor stop time for a given day.

Print View Generates a Schedule print report.

Table 149: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Setup View Returns user to SETUP Screen.


User screen

Figure 53: User screen

This screen allows definition of custom User ID’s and matching passwords. This allows the buildingadministrator to assign custom passwords to those who are authorized to maintain the chiller.Each custom user value is not linked to a specific button. Instead, the Change User Attributesbutton is pressed which enables the cursor arrows which are used to highlight the custom userparameter the user wishes to modify. At this point the Enter button is pressed and the value maybe entered.Table 150: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

None –


Data displaymode Operator Define the unit system (English or Metric) used by the chiller display.

Data format Operator This setpoint allows the date format to be displayed in DDD MMMYYY (default), DD.MM.YYY or YYYY-MM-DD.

User ID (1-4) ServiceThis allows the user to specify up to four (4) custom User ID values.Each User ID will then require a corresponding password and userlevel. A User ID can be defined for various maintenance personnel.



Systemlanguage Operator

Allows the user to define the language for all Screens. The desiredlanguage is selected by scrolling through the list of those available.English is the Default language and is selected by pressing the ▲key when the dialog box appears during the selection process.The selected language will not be displayed until after the usernavigates from the USER Screen to another screen. English is theonly language available.

Userpassword(1-4)

ServiceThis allows the user to specify up to four (4) custom passwordvalues. Each password will then require a corresponding User IDand user level.

User level(1-4) Service

This allows the user to specify up to four (4) custom User AccessLevels. Each access level will then require a corresponding passwordand User ID.



Comms screen

Figure 54: Comms screen

This screen allows definition of the necessary communications parameters. Refer to Printing fordetails of the printer connections and setup. The COM2 settings are automatically set when thedrive is set to VSD or MVVSD and therefore, the COM2 Setup button will not be displayed.Table 153: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

None –


Chiller ID Operator Displays the numeric chiller ID when used within an ISN network ofchillers. This ID number is also printed at the top of reports.

Printer Setupand COM2Setup

Operator

Pressing either key places a green selection box around the firstchangeable parameter. Use the ▲ and ▼ keys to place the selectionbox around the desired parameter to be changed. With the selectionbox around the desired parameter, press the Enter key. A dialogbox is displayed permitting data entry. In VSD or LC-SSS ModbusProtocol Configuration, COM2 button is not shown because COM2serial port is used for this interface.

Printer BaudRate – Displays the baud rate at which the panel communicates with the

printer.Printer DataBits – Displays the number of data bits the panel uses to communicate

with the printer.


Table 154: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionPrinter ParityBits – Displays the number of parity bits the panel uses to communicate

with the printer.Printer StopBits – Displays the number of stop bits the panel uses to communicate

with the printer.COM2 BaudRate – Displays the baud rate at which the panel communicates through

the modem port.COM2 DataBits – Displays the number of data bits the panel uses to communicate to

the modem port.COM2 ParityBits – Displays the number of parity bits the panel uses to communicate

through the modem port.COM 2 StopBits – Displays the number of stop bits the panel uses to communicate

through the modem port.



Printer screen

Figure 55: Printer screen

This screen allows definition of the necessary communications parameters for the printer. Refer toPrinting for details of the printer connections and setup.Table 156: Display onlyField/LEDname Access level Description

Timeremaininguntil nextPrint

– Displays the time until the next print log will occur, if the function isenabled.

Table 157: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionLog StartTime Operator Sets the time at which the scheduled print logs automatically print.

OutputInterval Operator Define the interval at which log printing will occur. (1 minute to 1440

minutes, Default = 60 minutes)AutomaticPrinterLogging(Enabled/Disabled)

Operator Enable the printer to begin printing status reports beginning at theprogrammed start time and recurring at the interval defined above.

Printer Type Service Define the printer type connected to the chiller system (Okidata,WeighTronix, Epson, Seiko, PC, Default = PC).



ACC AutoMap Print(Enabled/Disabled)

Service

Only available if the chiller system utilizes a Variable Speed Drivemotor controller. The chiller monitors the ACC communications andwhen a surge point is mapped, a short report of system parametersis printed. When this function is active, all other printing capability isdisabled.

ACC MapReport Service

Only available if the chiller system utilizes a Variable Speed Drivemotor controller. The chiller requests the entire surge map fromthe ACC. As the map is received, the parameters for each point areprinted.

Print Report Operator

Select the report type to print when the PRINT REPORT keyis selected. This can vary from status report (present systemparameters), Setpoints report (present value of the systemsetpoints), Schedule report (present value of the system scheduletimes), or a Sales Order Data report (information provided on theSALES ORDER Screen). A print report is generated upon completionof selection.

Print AllHistories Operator Generate a report of the system data at the time of all stored

shutdowns.

Table 158: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Setup View Returns user to Setup Screen.


Sales order screen

Figure 56: Sales order screen

This screen allows definition of the sales order parameters. The commissioning date is entered bythe Service Technician at the time of chiller commissioning. These values should never be changedor entered by anyone other than a qualified Service Technician. The remainder of the values areentered at the YORK Factory during the manufacturing of the chiller.Table 159: Display only*Field/LED name DescriptionModel number Factory defined model number of the chiller system.Panel serial number Factory defined serial number for the micropanel.Chiller serial number Factory defined serial number for the chiller system.YORK Order Number Factory defined order number under which the chiller was sold.

System information Factory defined conditions for which the chiller was originally ratedand sold.

Condenser and EvaporatorDesign Load Information

Factory defined description of the condenser and evaporatorconfiguration at time of shipment.

Nameplate information Factory defined information about the chiller motor configuration.

Note: * Access level required is View, Admin to change.


Table 160: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionCommission-ing Date Service Defines the date at which the chiller was commissioned.

Job Nameand Location Service Factory defined job name and location the chiller is destined for.

Print View This generates a listing of the Sales Order data.


EconomizerOrder

View

Admin toenter data

Displays the Economizer Sales Order Screen

Finish PanelSetup Admin Pressing this key saves all of the Sales Order Information.


Economizer sales order screen

Figure 57: Economizer sales order screen

This screen allows definition of the Economizer Sales Order parameters. The values are enteredat the YORK Factory during the manufacturing of the chiller or in the field by a Service Technicianwhen replacing a microboardTable 162: ProgrammableButton Access level Description

Change Admin tochange

Pressing this button displays a Green rectangle around the MotorCode parameter. The service technician can then use the keypadkeys to enter the appropriate values for each of the fields.


Sales order

View

Admin tochange

Returns user to Sales Order Screen.


Operations screen

Figure 58: Operations screen

This screen allows definition of general parameters having to do with the operation of the chiller.Table 164: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Chilller Run Time

Displays the amount of time the chiller has been running since thelast start signal was received. Value is reset to zero when the chillerenters coastdown. It remains at zero while shutdown and duringSystem Prelube

Table 165: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionControlSource Operator Defines whether the control of the chiller will be Local, Digital

Remote, Analog Remote, Modem Remote or ISN (BAS) Remote.

Number ofStarts Admin

Displays the number of the starts the chiller has initiated. This maybe reprogrammed to a desired value (generally when this value hasbeen reset due to a Microboard replacement) but should not bedone so arbitrarily.

OperatingHours Admin

Displays the total accumulated run time of the chiller. This may bereprogrammed to a desired value (generally when this value hasbeen reset due to a Microboard replacement), but should not bedone so arbitrarily

Level Control – Automatically set to Analog.OptiSave – Automatically set to Disabled.



Flow Switch Service Used to enter the applicable flow switch type. Paddle-type (TB4) orThermal-Type (J14) Flow sensors.

Hot GasControl(Enabled/Disabled)

Service Enables and disables the optional Hot Gas Bypass Control feature.

VGD(Enabled/Disabled)

ServiceEnables and disables the Variable Geometry Diffuser feature. Ifequipped with this feature, it should be enabled. Otherwise, itshould be disabled.

Chiller Style/Compressor Service Automatically set to Style G/K6-7 Com

Edit PhoneNumbers Service

Displays up to two service phone numbers. The Regional servicephone number is displayed as the first number. Although thelabel and number can be changed appropriately, the default forthis entry is “Johnson Controls North American Toll Free Number1-800-861-1001”. The Local service phone number is displayed asthe second number. Although blank by default, the appropriatelabel and number can be entered by a Service Technician.



History screen

Figure 59: History screen

This screen allows the user to browse through the faults. In order to get a more thorough reportingof the system conditions at the time of the recorded shutdown, move to the subscreen HISTORYDETAILS.The user may use the SELECT FAULT button to select the history to view. At this point the VIEWDETAILS button is used to jump to a subscreen containing stored chiller parameters values at thetime of the shutdown. Additionally, the PRINT HISTORY button can be used to generate a hard-copyreport of the parameter values at the time of the shutdown.Table 167: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Last Normal Shutdown

This window displays the date and time and the description of thelast normal shutdown. A normal shutdown is defined as:

• Local (Soft Stop Switch)• Remote (Digital, Analog or ISN (BAS))

Last Fault While Running This window displays the date and time and the description of thelast safety or cycling shutdown while the system was running.

Last 50 FaultsThis window displays a chronological listing (most recent first) ofthe date and time and the description of the last 50 safety or cyclingshutdowns that occur while the system is running or stopped.



Print History View This generates a report listing the status of the chiller parameters atthe time of the selected shutdown.

Print AllHistories View This generates a report listing the status of the chiller parameters at

the time of each of the stored shutdowns.


View Details ViewCauses a move to a subscreen containing the value of select chillerparameters at the time of the associated shutdown based upon theSelect Fault setting.

Trending View Causes a move to a subscreen allowing the user to view trendingdata on selected chiller parameters.

Custom View Operator Causes a move to a subscreen allowing the user to view theCUSTOM SETUP Screen.

Security Log Service Causes a move to a subscreen allowing the user to view a record ofthe last 75 setpoint changes.

Page Up View Displays the previous 10 Faults in the table.Page Down View Displays the next 10 Faults in the table.


History details screen

Figure 60: History details screen

This screen allows the user to see an on-screen printout of all the system parameters at the time ofthe selected shutdown. Not all screens are shown above. The number of screens required to displayall of the data varies according to type of motor starter and options applied.Table 170: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionHistory Printout This is the on-screen printout of the system parameters.

Table 171: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionPage Up View Scroll up in the displayed data (if applicable).Page Down View Scroll down in the displayed data (if applicable).

Print History View This generates a report listing the status of the chiller parameters atthe time of the selected shutdown.

Table 172: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.History View Returns user to HISTORY Screen.


Security log screen

Figure 61: Security log screen

This screen displays a listing of the last 75 setpoint changes. They are listed and numbered inreverse order in which they were changed, with the most recent listed as number 1. Multiple pagesare necessary to display all 75 changes. Not all setpoints are logged.The details of any setpoint change can be viewed by navigating to a subscreen that displays thedate and time of the change, access level and User ID used to make the change, the old setpointvalue and the new setpoint value.



Category Displays the category of the setpoint (motor, evaporator, condenser,etc.).

Setpoint Displays the setpoint that was changed.

New Value Displays the value that was entered at the time of the setpointchange.


Log Entry Allows the user to select a particular setpoint change for detailviewing.

Print Generates a detailed report of all setpoint changes listed in thesetpoint change log.

Page Up Scroll up in the displayed data (if applicable).Page Down Scroll down in the displayed data (if applicable).


Table 175: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME Screen.History Service Returns user to HISTORY Screen.

View Details Service Causes a move to a subscreen containing the details of the setpointchange selected with the LOG ENTRY key.


Security log details screen

Figure 62: Security log details screen

This screen allows the user to view the details of a logged setpoint change, selected from the list onthe SECURITY LOG Screen. The date and time the setpoint was changed, the new and old setpointvalue and access level and User ID used to make the change are displayed. The data on this screencan be printed.


Table 176: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionDescription Displays the setpoint/category that was changed.Time Displays the time the setpoint was changed.Date Displays the date the setpoint was changed.Access level Displays the login Access Level used to make the setpoint change.User ID Displays the login User ID used to make the setpoint change.Old Value Displays the previous setpoint value.New Value Displays the value entered at the time of the setpoint change.

Table 177: ProgrammableButton DescriptionPrint Generates a report of change parameters displayed on this screen.


Table 178: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome Service Returns user to HOME Screen.Security Log Service Returns user to SECURITY LOG Screen.


Custom view screen

Figure 63: Custom view screen

This screen allows up to 10 Service Technician selected parameters to be displayed. Theseparameters are selected from a list on the CUSTOM VIEW SETUP Screen. This allows the ServiceTechnician to display parameters pertinent to a particular problem during troubleshooting. Atcompletion of the service call, the display can be cleared or the parameters can be left there formonitoring by operations personnel.Table 179: Display only fieldsField/LED name DescriptionNone –


Table 180: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionPrint View This generates a listing of the parameters displayed on this screen.


Setup Operator Causes a jump to the subscreen that allows selection of theparameters to be displayed.


Custom view setup screen

Figure 64: Custom view setup screen

This screen allows the Service Technician to select up to 10 parameters for display on the CUSTOMVIEW Screen.



Slot numbers Lists the available parameters that can be displayed. The desiredparameters for display are selected from this list.

Table 183: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Custom View Service Returns user to CUSTOM VIEW Screen.


Table 184: ProgrammableButton DescriptionPage Up Scroll up through list of available parameters.Page Down Scroll down through list of available parameters

Custom Slot (1-10)Use the SELECT key and NUMERIC keypad keys as described aboveand enter the Slot Number from Slot Numbers list. Setting the SlotNumber to zero clears the display of this Slot Number.

Select

First use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys to scroll through theSlot Numbers list and note the number of the parameters to bedisplayed. Pressing the SELECT key places a green colored selectionbox around Custom Slot 1. If it is desired to change an alreadyentered parameter, use the 5 and 6 keys to place the selection boxaround the Slot Number to be changed. With the selection boxaround the Slot Number to be changed or entered, press the ENTER(\uFFFF) key. A dialog box is displayed permitting data entry. Usingthe NUMERIC keypad keys, enter the desired Slot Number and pressthe Enter key


Trend screen

Figure 65: Trend screen

As many as six Operator selected parameters (Data Points) can be plotted in an X/Y graph format.The X-Axis is scaled per the selected Data Collection Interval and displayed in a time of dayor elapsed time format, as selected with the X-Axis TOGGLE key. The Y-Axis is scaled for eachparameter per the selected minimum and maximum value for each parameter. Analog parametersare scaled in pressure, temperature, volts, amps, hertz or time. Digital on/off parameters arescaled as zero (off) and one (on). Only one Y-Axis label is displayed at a time. The Y-Axis TOGGLEKey is used to toggle the Y-Axis labels through the different parameters. The Y-Axis label that isbeing displayed is identified at the top of the graph. For identification, each plotted parameter andassociated Y-Axis labeling is color coordinated.The DATA SELECT key is used to display all trended Data Points simultaneously or select a singleData Point for display. The parameters are sampled at the selected Data Collection Interval andplotted using 450 data points across the X-Axis. If the actual value of the sampled parameter is lessthan the Y-Axis label minimum for that parameter, the value will be plotted at the minimum value.Similarly, if the actual value is greater than the Y-Axis label maximum for that parameter, the valuewill be plotted at the maximum value.There are three types of charts that can be created: One Screen, Continuous or Triggered.When plotting reaches the end of the X-Axis, if one screen is selected, trending stops and data isfrozen. If continuous is selected, the oldest data is dropped from the left-hand side of the graphat the next collection interval. Thereafter, the oldest data is dropped from the left hand-side of thegraph at each data collection interval. If triggered is selected, data collection can be set to startor stop based upon the selected Trigger Action (start or stop). If start is selected, data collectionwill not begin until the triggers have been satisfied and any selected trigger delay has elapsed.Data collection will stop at the completion of one screen of data as with the one screen. If stop isselected, data collection will not stop until the triggers have been satisfied and any selected triggerdelay has elapsed.


If a power failure occurs while the trending is running, the trending is stopped. Upon restoration ofpower, the last screen of data that was collected will be displayed on the TREND Screen. The STARTkey must be pressed to initiate a new TREND Screen.Display onlyThis screen allows the user to view the graphical trending of the selected parameters and is also agateway to the graph setup screens.

Note: A red screen with the words “TREND MAX MUST BE > TREND MIN” will appear if the Y-Axis minimum has been programmed to a value that is greater than the Y-Axis maximum forany parameter. If this appears, proceed to the TREND SETUP Screen to change the values.


Start Operator

Pressing this key clears the graph, starts a new graph, sets the timeof day to the present clock time and begins the trending. This keyis only available if trending is stopped. If the selected Chart Type istriggered and Trigger Action is set to Start, data collection will notbegin until the triggers have been satisfied and any selected triggerdelay has elapsed. Otherwise, data collection will begin immediately.

Stop OperatorPressing this key stops the trending. The trend data is frozen on thedisplay until another graph is started with the START key. The STOPkey is only available if trending is running.

Print View

Allows the data on the TREND Screen to be printed in tabularformat. If set to existing, a snapshot of the data presently on thescreen is sent to the printer. If set to new, all data collected afterpressing this key will be sent to the printer as it is collected. If setto disabled, no data is sent to the printer. Refer to Printing of thismanual for printout example.

Data Select ViewAllows the user to display all trended data points simultaneously orselect a single trended data point for display, hiding the other datapoints. Selections are All Data or Data Point X (1-6).

Y-Axis View This key toggles the Y-Axis labels of the graph. Each key presschanges the label to another of the selected parameters.

X-Axis View

This key toggles the X-Axis labels of the graph. Each key pressalternates the scaling between time of day and elapsed time. TheTime of Day scaling is in 24-hour format. The Elapsed Time scalingis the time elapsed since the START key was pressed, starting thetrending.


Trend Setup – Only displayed if the trending is stopped. Causes a jump to asubscreen for configuring the trending display


Trend setup screen

Figure 66: Trend setup screen

This screen is used to configure the TRENDING Screen. The parameters to be trended are selectedfrom the COMMON SLOTS Screen or Common Slots Master list and entered as Slot Numbers forData Points 1 through 6. The Y-Axis minimum and maximum values for each parameter are enteredas Data Point Min and Data Point Max for Data Points 1 through 6. The interval at which all theparameters are sampled is selected as the Data Collection Interval.Table 187: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionChart Type Operator Selects Continuous, One Screen Or Triggered type of graph.

Select Operator

This key is used to enter the Slot Numbers and the minimum andmaximum Y-Axis values of each parameter to be trended. Pressingthis key places a yellow box around Data Point 1 Slot Number. Usethe ▲ and ▼ navigation keys to place the box around the valueof Data Points 1 through 6 to be changed. With the desired valueselected, press the X key. A dialog box is displayed permitting dataentry.

Data PointSlot #(1-6) Operator

Use the SELECT key as described above and enter the Slot Numberfrom the COMMON SLOTS Screen or Master Slot Number List ofthe desired parameter to be trended. The selected parameterdescription will be displayed for the Data Point. Setting this SlotNumber to zero will disable trending for that particular Data Point.Any or all points can be disabled.



Data PointMin (1-6) Operator

Only displayed if the Associated Slot Number is not Zero. This isthe minimum value displayed for the Y-Axis. Selecting a parameterfor a Data Point sets this to the default value, which is the lowestvalue allowed for that parameter. It can be changed to a value thatprovides a more appropriate resolution for the parameter beingmonitored. To change, use the SELECT key as described above andenter the desired value. The value must always be set to a value lessthan the Data Point Max. Otherwise, a red graph is displayed on theTREND Screen with the words TREND MAX MUST BE > TREND MIN.If the parameter selected for this data point is a digital type (on/off),this value must be set to zero (0). Zero indicates the OFF state.

CollectionInterval Operator

Selects the interval at which the parameters are sampled. Thereare 450 data points displayed across the X-Axis of the graph. Eachpoint represents the instantaneous value of the parameter. Theuser selects the time interval between these points. This is called theData Collection Interval, or the interval at which the parameter issampled. This interval is programmable over the range of 1 secondto 3600 seconds (1 hour), in one second increments. The selectedinterval not only determines the sample interval, but also the fullscreen time display. The full screen time display is a result of theselected interval in seconds, multiplied by the 450 data points. Forexample, if the Data Collection Interval is programmed for 900seconds, the parameter would be sampled every 900 seconds,with the last 112.5 hours (4.7 days) of data viewable on the screen.Therefore, the selected interval is a compromise between resolutionand full screen time display*.

Data PointMax (1-6) Operator

Only displayed if the associated Slot Number is not zero. This is themaximum value displayed for the Y-Axis. Selecting a parameterfor a Data Point sets this to the default value, which is the highestvalue allowed for that parameter. It can be changed to a value thatprovides a more appropriate resolution for the parameter beingmonitored. To change, use the SELECT key as described above andenter the desired value. The value must always be set to a valuegreater than the Data Point Min. Otherwise, a red graph is displayedon the TREND Screen with the words TREND MAX MUST BE > TRENDMIN. There are 20 Y-Axis divisions. If a MIN-MAX span is selectedthat is not evenly divided by 20, the program will automaticallyselect the next higher MAX value that makes the span evenly dividedby 20. For example, if 0.0 is selected as the MIN and 69.0 is selectedas the MAX, the program will insert 70.0 as the MAX value. If theparameter selected for this data point is a digital type (on/off), thisvalue must be set to one (1). One indicates the on state.


Note: *Select the desired Data Collection Interval as follows:

1. Determine the desired time interval (in seconds), between data samples.2. Calculate the full screen time display as follows:

- 450 x Data Collection Interval equals full screen seconds.- Full screen seconds/60 equals full screen minutes.- Full screen minutes/60 equals full screen hours.- Full screen hours/24 equals full screen days.

3. Decide if the resultant sample interval and full screen display meet the requirements. Ifnot, select a different sample interval.

Table 188: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Trend View Returns user to TREND Screen.

Slot Numbers –Causes a jump to a subscreen that lists the Slot Numbers of themost commonly monitored parameters. The desired parameters tobe plotted are selected from this screen.

Triggers –Causes a jump to the Advanced TREND SETUP Screen, where thestart/stop Triggers can be setup. Only displayed if triggered hasbeen selected as Chart Type.


Advanced trend setup screen

Figure 67: Advanced trend setup screen

The desired data collection start/stop triggers are setup on this screen. The trend data collectioncan be set to start or stop based upon the status of up to two selected triggers.The triggers can consist of digital events or analog parameters compared to thresholds. Thetriggers can be used individually or in combination. The digital and analog parameters are selectedfrom the COMMON SLOTS Screen (or Master Slot Numbers List in this manual).The parameter selected as the Primary Trigger is compared to a value selected as the Primary Test,using the Primary Operator as a comparator. If it is evaluated as true, then the data collection isstarted or stopped (after any selected trigger delay) per the selected Trigger Action.A Secondary Trigger can be evaluated with the Primary Trigger to start/stop data collection. ThePrimary to Secondary Operator is used to define the trigger combinations required to be true tostart/stop data collection. The Secondary Trigger is setup and evaluated the same as the PrimaryTrigger.Entry fields are as follows:

1. Primary Trigger

a. Primary Operatorb. Primary Test

2. Primary to Secondary Operator3. Secondary Trigger

a. Secondary Operatorb. Secondary Test


4. Trigger Action

a. Delay of Trigger Delay

After the desired triggers are set, the START key on the TREND Screen must be manually pressedbefore the triggers will be evaluated. While waiting for the triggers to start or stop data collection, astatus message is displayed in the upper right corner of the TREND Screen describing the pendingaction.Table 189: Display onlyField/LED name DescriptionNone –


PrimaryTrigger Operator

Selects the first parameter to be evaluated. Selection is made fromthe Slot Numbers listing on the TREND COMMON SLOTS Screenor the Master Slot Numbers List in this manual. Setting this SlotNumber to zero disables the Primary Trigger.

PrimaryOperator Operator

Selects the comparator for the Primary Trigger’s relationship to thePrimary Test. If the Primary Trigger is an analog value, selectionsare: <, <=, =, =>, >. If the Primary Trigger is a digital event, selectionsare: Equal To, Not Equal To.

Primary Test OperatorSelects the value or condition that the Primary Trigger is comparedto. Selection ranges from the Primary Trigger minimum value to thePrimary Trigger maximum value.

TriggerAction Operator

Selects whether the trend data collection will Start or Stop when thetrigger comparisons are true. If set to Start, data collection will stopafter one screen of data is collected.

Trigger Delay Operator

Allows the data collection start or stop to be delayed after thetriggers evaluate as true. The delay is selectable from 1 to 864000seconds (10 days). Display is in days, hours, minutes and seconds.The delay timer begins when the triggers evaluate as true. If theTrigger Action is set to Start, data collection will begin after thetriggers evaluate as true and the delay timer has elapsed. If theTrigger Action is set to Stop, data collection will stop after thetriggers evaluate as true and the delay timer has elapsed.

Primary toSecondaryOperator

Operator

Selects whether the Primary Trigger, Secondary Trigger or bothhave to be true in order to start or stop data collection. Selectionsare AND, OR, XOR and None. If NONE is selected, the SecondaryTrigger is disabled.

Data collection will start/stop (as selected with Trigger Action) when:

• If AND selected: Both Primary AND Secondary are true• If OR selected: Either Primary OR Secondary (or both) are true• If XOR selected: Either Primary OR Secondary (but not both)

are true



SecondaryTrigger Operator

Selects the second parameter to be evaluated. Selection is madefrom the Slot Numbers listing on the TREND COMMON SLOTSScreen or the Master Slot Numbers List in this manual. Setting thisSlot Number to zero disables the Secondary Trigger.

SecondaryOperator Operator

Selects the comparator for the Secondary Trigger’s relationshipto the Secondary Test. If the Secondary trigger is an Analog value,selections are: <, <=, =, =>, >. If the Secondary Trigger is a digitalevent, selections are: Equal To, Not Equal To.

SecondaryTest Operator

Selects the value or condition that the Secondary Trigger iscompared to. Selection ranges from the Secondary Triggerminimum to the Secondary Trigger maximum.

Table 191: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Trend Setup – Returns user to TREND SETUP Screen.


Common slots screen

Figure 68: Common slots screen

This screen displays the Slot Numbers of the commonly monitored parameters. The Slot Numbersfor the remainder of the available parameters are listed on the Master Slot Numbers List shown inTable 195.From these lists, select up to six parameters to be trended. Return to the TREND SETUP Screen andenter the parameters Slot Numbers into Data Points 1 through 6.Table 192: Display onlyField/LED name Description

Slot Numbers These are the Slot Numbers of the most commonly usedparameters.

Table 193: ProgrammableButton Access level DescriptionPage Down Operator Scroll down in the displayed dataPage Up Operator Scroll up in the displayed dataPrint Operator Generates a list of the Slot Numbers of the available parameters.

Table 194: NavigationButton Access level DescriptionHome View Returns user to HOME Screen.Trend Setup View Returns user to TREND SETUP Screen.


Table 195: YK-EP trend slot numbersGeneral Description Mod A SSS Mod B SSS MVSSS VSD MVVSD E-M

256 Chiller Operating State X X X X X X259 Safety Relay X X X X X X260 Cycling Relay X X X X X X261 Warning Relay X X X X X X262 Operating Hours X X X X X X264 Number Of Starts X X X X X X265 Soft Stop X X X X X X266 Start X X X X X X267 Remote Ready To Start X X X X X X

EVAPORATOR

1792 Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature X X X X X X

1793 Temperature Differential X X X X X X1794 Chilled Liquid Flow Switch X X X X X X1795 Chilled Liquid Pump X X X X X X

1807 Entering Chilled LiquidTemperature X X X X X X

1808 Evaporator Pressure X X X X X X

1809 Evaporator SaturationTemperature X X X X X X

1810 Evaporator Small TempDifference X X X X X X

1812 Evaporator RefrigerantTemperature X X X X X X

1813 Delta P / P X X X X X XCONDENSER

2048 Leaving Condenser LiquidTemperature X X X X X X

2049 Condenser Liquid Flow Switch X X X X X X2050 Condenser Liquid Pump X X X X X X

2051 Entering Condenser LiquidTemperature X X X X X X

2052 Condenser Pressure X X X X X X

2053 Condenser SaturationTemperature X X X X X X

2054 Condenser Small TempDifference X X X X X X

2057 High Pressure Switch X X X X X X2059 Subcooling Temperature X X X X X X

2061 Drop Leg RefrigerantTemperature X X X X X X

COMPRESSOR1280 Vane Motor Switch X X X X X X1281 Pre-Rotation Vanes Position X X X X X X1282 Pre-Rotation Vanes Opening X X X X X X1283 Pre-Rotation Vanes Closing X X X X X X1296 Discharge Temperature X X X X X X1299 Discharge Superheat X X X X X X1817 Liquid Line Solenoid X X X X X X2063 Vent Line Solenoid X X X X X X

OIL SUMP1536 Oil Pressure X X X X X X1537 Oil Sump Temperature X X X X X X1539 Oil Pump Run Output X X X X X X



1542 Oil Heater X X X X X X1543 Oil Return Solenoid X X X X X X1544 Oil Return Min X X X X X X8192 Pump Oil Pressure (HOP) X X X X X X8193 Sump Oil Pressure (LOP) X X X X X X

SURGE8236 ACC Surge Detected X X X X X X8238 Surge Avoidance Surge Count X X X X X X8319 Surge Avoidance Surge Detected X X X X X X

VARIABLE SPEED OIL PUMP

8197 Oil Pump Drive CommandFrequency X X X X X X

CONDENSER REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL29199 Condenser Level Control State X X X X X X

29200 Condenser Level ControlCommand X X X X X X

29201 Condenser Active Level Setpoint X X X X X X29231 Condenser Refrigerant Level X X X X X X

PROXIMITY PROBE8223 High Speed Thrust Solenoid X X X X X X

8225 High Speed Thrust BearingProximity Differential X X X X X X

VARIABLE GEOMETRY DIFFUSER1281 Pre-Rotation Vanes Position X X X X X X8280 Stall Detector Voltage X X X X X X8281 Diffuser Gap Open X X X X X X8282 Diffuser Gap Close X X X X X X

17408 Discharge Pressure X X X X X XSTARTER

2305 Motor Run X X X X X X2306 % Full Load Amps X X X X n/a X

2351 Operating Hours Since LastMotor Lubrication X X X X n/a X

2560 Phase A Current X n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a2561 Phase B Current X n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a2562 Phase C Current X n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a2563 Phase A Voltage X n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a2564 Phase B Voltage X n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a2565 Phase C Voltage X n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a2570 Input Power n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2571 kW Hours n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2572 Phase A Current n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2573 Phase B Current n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2574 Phase C Current n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2575 Phase A Voltage n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2576 Phase B Voltage n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2577 Phase C Voltage n/a X X n/a n/a n/a2578 Phase A Temperature n/a X n/a n/a n/a n/a2579 Phase B Temperature n/a X n/a n/a n/a n/a2580 Phase C Temperature n/a X n/a n/a n/a n/a2817 Full Load Amps n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a2818 Input Power n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2819 kW Hours n/a n/a n/a X X n/a



2820 DC Bus Voltage n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2821 DC Inverter Link Current n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2822 Output Frequency n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2823 Output Voltage n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2824 Phase A Output Current n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2825 Phase B Output Current n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2826 Phase C Output Current n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2827 Precharge Relay Output n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2828 Trigger SCR Output n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2829 Water Pump Output n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2833 Internal Ambient Temperature n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2834 Converter Heatsink Temperature n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2835 Phase A Heatsink Temperature n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2836 Phase B Heatsink Temperature n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2837 Phase C Heatsink Temperature n/a n/a n/a X n/a n/a2982 DC Bus Voltage AU n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a2983 DC Bus Voltage AL n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a2984 DC Bus Voltage BU n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a2985 DC Bus Voltage BL n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a2986 DC Bus Voltage CU n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a2987 DC Bus Voltage CL n/a n/a n/a n/a X n/a

ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL2847 Surge Margin Adjust n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2849 ACC Surge Count n/a n/a n/a X X n/a2981 ACC Surge Sensitivity n/a n/a n/a X X n/a3004 VSD Start Frequency n/a n/a n/a X X n/a3005 Mapping Enable n/a n/a n/a X X n/a3006 Quick Ramp Current Threshold n/a n/a n/a X X n/a

ECONOMIZER OPERATION29446 Econ Number of Starts X X X X X X29447 Econ Operating Hours X X X X X X

ECONOMIZER28707 Econ Pressure X X X X X X28708 Econ Saturation Temperature X X X X X X28729 Econ High Pressure Switch X X X X X X

ECONOMIZER VARIABLE SPEED OIL PUMP30977 Econ Active Oil Pressure Setpoint X X X X X X

30988 Econ Oil Pump VSD FrequencyCommand Hz X X X X X X

30994 Econ Oil Pump Run Stop State X X X X X X30995 Econ Oil Pump VSD State X X X X X X30996 Econ Pump Oil Pressure (HOP) X X X X X X30999 Econ Oil Pressure Diff. X X X X X X

ECONOMIZER COMPRESSOR28706 Econ Discharge Temperature X X X X X X30724 Econ PRV Opening X X X X X X30725 Econ PRV Closing X X X X X X30726 Econ PRV State X X X X X X30735 Econ PRV Position X X X X X X30739 Vane Motor Switch X X X X X X31488 Econ Discharge Superheat X X X X X X

ECONOMIZER REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL28717 Econ Refrigerant Level X X X X X X



29960 Econ Level Control ValveCommand X X X X X X

29961 Econ Level Setpoint X X X X X X29966 Econ Level Control State X X X X X X

ECONOMIZER HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING

29445 Econ High Speed Thrust BearingLimit Switch X X X X X X

ECONOMIZER CAPACITY CONTROL28707 Econ Pressure X X X X X X28708 Econ Saturation Temperature X X X X X X30473 Econ Speed of Sound X X X X X X30474 Econ Isentropic Head X X X X X X30475 Econ Omega X X X X X X30476 Econ Surge Mach X X X X X X

30478 Econ Anti-Surge MinimumTemperature X X X X X X

30722 Econ PRV Command Pos. X X X X X X31493 Econ Active Load Limit X X X X X X31494 Econ Head Pressure X X X X X X

31511 Econ Motor Current Max.Override Threshold X X X X X X

31755 Econ Capacity Control State X X X X X XECONOMIZER STATE MACHINE

28948 Econ Motor Run X X X X X X29440 Econ CCC State X X X X X X31766 Econ Operation Mode X X X X X X


Display messagesThe Status Bar of the display contains a Status Line and, beneath it, a Details Line. The Status Linecontains a message describing the operating state of the chiller; whether it is stopped, running,starting or shutting down. The Details Line displays Warning, Cycling, Safety, Start Inhibit and othermessages that provide further details of the Status Bar messages. The Status Messages listedbelow are displayed on the Status Line. All other messages are displayed on the Details Line.For messages specific to the Variable Speed Drive, Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive, SolidState Starter and Medium Voltage Solid State Starter, refer to the applicable service manual asfollows:Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M4);Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive – Service (Form 160.00-M6);Solid State Starter (Mod “B”) – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.00-O2);Medium Voltage Solid State Starter – Service (Form 160.00-M5).To aid in the meaning of the message, messages are displayed in different colors as follows:Table 196: Message colorsMESSAGE COLORNormal Operation GreenWarning YellowCycling Shutdown OrangeSafety Shutdown Red

Status messagesSystem ready to startThe chiller is shut down but will start upon receipt of a local or remote start signal.

Cycling shutdown – Auto restartThe chiller is shut down on a cycling shutdown. The cause of the shutdown is still in effect andis displayed on the Details Line of the Status Bar. The chiller will automatically restart when thecycling condition clears.

Safety shutdown – Manual restartThe chiller is shut down on a safety shutdown. The cause of the shutdown is still in effect and isdisplayed on the Details Line of the Status Bar. The chiller can be started after the safety conditionclears and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

System prelubeA chiller start has been initiated and the pre-start lubrication is being performed. The prelubeduration is either 50 seconds or 180 seconds, as configured with a Microboard Program Switch. Theprelube duration must never be changed by anyone other than a qualified Service Technician. Thestandard prelube duration is 50 seconds.

System runThe chiller is running under the condition described in the Details Line of the Status Bar.


System run – Cooling modeThe chiller is running with Heat Pump Duty enabled and the Heat Pump Duty Operational modesetpoint set to Cooling mode. In this mode, the Heat Pump is controlling the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature to the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint.

System coastdownThe chiller has shut down and the Post-run lubrication is being performed. The Coastdownduration is determined by the setting of the Coastdown (standard or enhanced) and CoastdownTime Setpoints. If the Coastdown setpoint is set to enhanced (steam turbine applications), itis 15 minutes. If set to standard (electric motor applications), it is programmable over a rangedetermined by the Chiller Style/Compressor Setpoint (for style G/K6-K7, the range is 240 (default) to900 seconds.

Start inhibitThe chiller is prevented from being started due to the reason displayed on the Details Line of theStatus Bar.

Vanes closing before shutdownDisplayed while the Pre-Rotation Vanes are closing during a Soft Shutdown. During Soft Shutdowns,the Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down the compressor. When the Vane Motor EndSwitch closes, indicating the Vanes have fully closed (or 3.5 minutes have elapsed, whichever occursfirst), the Run Signal is removed from the compressor motor starter and a System Coastdown isperformed. Soft Shutdowns are initiated by the following:

1. Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low temperature2. Remote Stop3. Multi-Unit Cycling – Contacts Open4. System Cycling – Contacts Open5. Control Panel – Schedule6. Operator Initiated at Keypad

While the Vanes are closing during any Soft Shutdown, if a Local Stop is initiated with theCompressor Switch or any faults other than those listed above occur, the Soft Shutdown isterminated and it will immediately perform a System Coastdown.

Run messagesLeaving chilled liquid controlThe chiller is running, controlling the Leaving Chilled Liquid to the Leaving Chilled LiquidTemperature Setpoint. There are no system conditions inhibiting this operation.

Heat pump – Leaving chilled liquid controlThe Heat Pump is running, controlling the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature to the LeavingChilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. In this mode, Heat Pump Duty is enabled and the Heat PumpDuty Operational mode setpoint is set to Cooling mode.

Current pulldown limitThe Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoint timer is in effect and the Compressor Motor current isgreater than or equal to the Pulldown Demand Current Limit Setpoint value. The Pre-Rotation Vaneoperation is being inhibited as described in Motor – High Current Limit message below.


Motor – High current limitThe Compressor Motor current is greater than or equal to the local or remote Current LimitSetpoint. The Current Limit Setpoint is programmed over a range of 30 to 100% of the ChillerFull Load Amps (FLA). When the motor current increases to the Inhibit Open threshold, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are inhibited from further opening. This prevents a further current rise. If thecurrent continues to rise to the Start Close threshold, the Vanes begin closing until the current fallsto the Stop Close threshold. Automatic Vane operation is resumed and this message automaticallyclears when the motor current decreases to the Allow Open threshold. The thresholds are differentfor the various motor starter applications. To allow field calibration of the Solid State Starter (Mod“A”) Logic Board or CM-2 Current Module, pressing the Pre-Rotation Vanes OPEN key in SERVICEaccess level, starts a 10 minute timer during which the current limit thresholds are elevated. Referto table:

Table 197: Motor current thresholdsMotor current (%FLA)

Vane controlElectro- mechanical/ Solid State Starter VSD Service mode

On rise, inhibit open 100 100 107On fall, allow open 98 98 106On rise, start close 104 103 110On fall, stop close 102 101 109

An example of current limit is as follows: If a Solid Sate Starter chiller FLA is 100 Amps, and theCurrent Limit Setpoint is 50%, the following will occur:

• 50 Amps – inhibit vane open• 52 Amps – vanes begin closing• 51 Amps – vanes stop closing• 49 Amps – allow automatic vane control

Load control mode - Access level required: ServiceThe Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive has not yet reached full speed after having beencommanded to do so in Manual Speed Control mode. While this is displayed, the Pre-RotationVanes are inhibited from further opening.

Start inhibit messagesAnti-Recycle XX min/SecThe chiller is inhibited from starting because the 30 minute anti-recycle time has not yet elapsed.Time remaining is displayed.

Vane Motor Switch OpenThe chiller is inhibited from starting because the Pre-Rotation Vanes are not fully closed.

Motor – Current >15% FLAThis start inhibit is instantaneously set whenever the chiller is not running and a motor currentof greater than 15% FLA is detected. The oil pump is started as soon as this fault is detected. Thestarting frequency for the Variable Speed Oil Pump is 45.0 Hz. The start inhibit is released when themotor current decreases to greater than or equal to 15% FLA and the WARNING RESET button ispressed. A full System Coastdown is performed when this fault is released.


VSD – Frequency > 0 HzThis start inhibit is set whenever the chiller is shutdown and a Compressor Motor Variable SpeedDrive (VSD) Output Frequency of greater than 0 Hz is detected. This fault is released and the chillercan be started after the frequency is at 0 Hz and the WARNING RESET button is pressed. The oilpump is started (with a starting frequency of 45 Hz) as soon as this fault is detected. A SystemCoastdown is performed whenever this fault is released.

LCSSS – High Temperature Phase X - Stopped(Mod. “B” Solid State Starter only)

The chiller is stopped and the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detectedthat the temperature of phase A, B, or C (designated as X in this message) Silicon ControlledRectifier (SCR) Module is greater than 110°F. The starter cooling pump will run and the chiller willbe inhibited from starting until the temperature decreases to less than 109°F.

Warning messagesWarning – Real Time Clock FailureDuring the initialization process that occurs when power is applied to the Control Center, testdata is written to a location in the Real Time Clock. This data is then read from the Real Time Clockand compared to the test data. If the read data is not the same as that which was written to thedevice, it is assumed the Real Time Clock operation is defective and this message is displayed. Themicroboard should be replaced by a qualified Service Technician.

Warning – Condenser or Evaporator XDCR ErrorThe Evaporator Pressure transducer is indicating a higher pressure than the Condenser pressuretransducer after the chiller has been running for 10 minutes. This is indicative of a Condenser orEvaporator transducer failure. This message will be displayed until the condition clears and theWARNING RESET Keypad key is pressed in Operator (or higher) access mode. Condition not checkedin Brine mode.

Warning – Standby Lube – Low Oil PressureA minimum of 15 PSID of oil pressure was not achieved in the first 30 seconds of a StandbyLubrication cycle, or the pressure decreased below this value during the remainder of the cycle.This message will be displayed and no further Standby Lubrications will be performed until theWARNING RESET key is pressed in Operator (or higher) access mode.

This warning is also set when either the Pump Oil Pressure transducer or the Sump Oil Pressuretransducer is less than 2 PSIG when a Standby Lube is requested by automatic control. This inhibitsthe Standby Lube cycle when the chiller is open to atmosphere.

Warning – Setpoint OverrideA blank FeRam memory device or a failure of this device was detected during the initializationprocess that occurs when power is applied to the Control Center. Due to this failure, any or allof the programmed Setpoints could have been corrupted. Therefore, all Setpoints have beenautomatically changed to their Default values. All Setpoints will have to be programmed to theirdesired values. This message will clear when the WARNING RESET key is pressed in Operator (orhigher) access mode.

Warning – Condenser – High Pressure LimitThe Condenser Pressure exceeds the High Pressure Warning Setpoint threshold, programmedby a Service Technician logged in at SERVICE access level. While this condition is in effect, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are inhibited from further opening. This message automatically clears and theVanes are permitted to open when the condenser pressure decreases to 5 PSIG below the Setpoint.


Warning – Evaporator – Low Pressure LimitThe Evaporator Pressure has decreased to the Warning threshold. This threshold is fixed in Watercooling applications. In Brine cooling applications, the threshold is a fixed amount above theprogrammable safety shutdown threshold. The Safety threshold in Brine applications is determinedby the Brine solution and is determined by the YORK Factory. While this condition is in effect, thePre-Rotation Vanes are inhibited from further opening. This message automatically clears and theVanes are permitted to open when the Evaporator Pressure increases to the reset value.

Table 198: Warning and reset thresholdsWarning threshold (PSIG) Reset threshold (PSIG)

Water Brine Water BrineR22 56.2 +1.9 more than Safety Setpoint 57.5 +3.2 more than Safety Setpoint

R134a 27.0 +2.0 >Safety Setpoint 28.0 +3.0>Safety Setpoint

Warning – Vanes Uncalibrated – Fixed SpeedThe Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD) is operating Fixed Speed (full speed) modebecause the Pre-Rotation Vanes position potentiometer calibration has not been performed.

Warning – Harmonic Filter – Operation InhibitedThe Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD) Harmonic Filter has been inhibited. Refer toVariable Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M1). Harmonic Filter operation should not bealtered by anyone other than a qualified Service Technician.

Warning – Harmonic Filter – Data LossCommunications between the Harmonic Filter Logic Board and the Compressor Motor VariableSpeed Drive VSD Logic Board or the Adaptive Capacity Control Board is not occurring. While thiscondition exists, all filter related parameters are displayed as X’s. This message automatically clearswhen communications are restored.

Warning – Harmonic Filter – Input Frequency RangeThe power line frequency detected by the Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD) HarmonicFilter is outside the range of 58 to 62 Hz (60 Hz), or 49 to 51 Hz (50 Hz). While this condition exists,all filter related parameters are displayed as X’s. This message automatically clears when the linefrequency is within range.

Warning – Harmonic Filter – Not RunningThis warning is set when all of the following are true for 20 continuous seconds:

• Chiller is running• Filter is enabled• Filter present status is true• Run Time greater than 20 seconds• Filter operating mode is stopped

This warning is released when the chiller is stopped, but will be displayed until manually clearedusing the WARNING RESET key when logged in at OPERATOR (or higher) access level.

Warning – Vanes UncalibratedThe Hot Gas Bypass feature is enabled, but the Pre-Rotation Vanes calibration procedure has notyet been performed.


Warning – External I/O – Serial CommunicationsSerial communications between the Microboard and the optional Analog I/O Board has beeninterrupted for at least 20 seconds.

Warning – Excess Surge Detected(Applies only if Surge Protection Shutdown feature is Disabled)

The Surge Window Count has exceeded the Count Limit. Message can be manually cleared after theSurge Window Count is less than or equal to the Count Limit, or the Shutdown feature is enabled orthe chiller is stopped. To clear message press WARNING RESET key on HOME Screen when loggedin at OPERATOR (or higher) access level.

Warning – Surge Protection – Excess Surge Limit(Applies only if Surge Protection Extended Run feature is Enabled)

Displayed during the Surge Protection 10 minute Extended Run period. This period begins whenthe Surge Window Count exceeds the Count Limit. During this period, the Pre-Rotation Vanes aredriven closed. When 10 minutes have elapsed, this message and the Pre-Rotation Vanes load inhibitare automatically cleared. Message and load inhibit are also cleared when the chiller is shutdown.

Note: If the optional Hot Gas Bypass feature is enabled, the valve position must be at 100%before the Extended Run is implemented. If the chiller is chiller is equipped with a CompressorMotor Variable Speed Drive, the output frequency must be at full speed (50 Hz/60 Hz) beforethis control can be implemented.

Warning – Condenser Or VGD Sensor FailureThe difference between the Stall Pressure transducer output and the Condenser Pressuretransducer output has exceeded 0.28VDC for 3 continuous minutes while the chiller was running.This feature verifies the operation of the Stall transducer and the Condenser transducer. Sinceboth transducers are measuring essentially the same pressure, both outputs should be withinthe specified tolerance. This message must be manually cleared. It will be displayed until thetransducer outputs are within the acceptable range of each other and the WARNING RESET key inSERVICE access level.

While this message is displayed, the Variable Geometry Diffuser (VGD) is driven to the full openposition and held there until this warning is manually cleared. When cleared, the VGD returnsnormal operation.

Warning – Conditions Override VGDAn extreme stall condition has been detected while the chiller was running. An extreme stallcondition exists when the Stall Detector Voltage (output of the Stall Detector Board) exceeds twicethe High Limit setpoint for the duration programmed in the Extreme Stall Duration Setpoint (10 to20 minutes). While this message is displayed, the compressor Variable Geometry Diffuser (VGD) isdriven to the full open position and held there until the message is manually cleared. This protectsthe VGD ring from possible damage from an extreme stall condition. This message can be clearedafter the Stall Detector Voltage returns to less than two times the High Limit Setpoint and theWARNING RESET key is pressed in SERVICE access level.

The extreme stall condition is not checked under the following conditions:

• While the VGD is in manual control mode.• While the VGD is fully closed (VGD Limit Switch closed).• While the Pre-Rotation Vanes position is greater than the PRV VGD INHIBIT Setpoint.


Warning – Motor Bearing Lube SuggestedThe Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication has exceeded 1000 hours. This will be displayeduntil manually cleared by the Operator or the Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubricationexceed 1200 hours, whereupon it is replaced by the message WARNING – MOTOR BEARING LUBEREQUIRED below. The Operator clears this message by entering his/her initials, name or user IDin OPERATOR access level (or higher) using the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key on the MOTORLUBRICATION Screen. Refer to the Motor lubrication screen for entry instructions. The date andtime of this entry is automatically logged as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication and Time Of LastMotor Lubrication. It also resets the Operating Hours Since Last Lubrication to zero. The date thiswarning occurs is stored as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication Warning Or Fault. This warningmessage will not be displayed if the Auto Lube Setpoint on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screenenabled.

Warning – Motor Bearing Lube RequiredThe Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication has exceeded 1200 hours. This replacesWARNING – MOTOR BEARING LUBE SUGGESTED above. This is displayed until manually cleared bythe Operator or the Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication exceed 1400 hours, whereuponit is replaced by the message Motor – Lack Of Bearing Lubrication below. The Operator clears thismessage by entering his/her initials, name or user ID in OPERATOR access level (or higher) usingthe MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen. Refer to the Motorlubrication screen for entry instructions. The date and time of this entry is automatically logged asthe Date Of Last Motor Lubrication and Time Of Last Motor Lubrication. It also resets the OperatingHours Since Last Lubrication to zero. The date this warning occurs is stored as the Date Of LastMotor Lubrication Warning Or Fault. This warning message will not be displayed if the Auto LubeSetpoint on the MOTOR LUBRICATION Screen enabled.

Warning – Motor – High Winding TemperatureThis warning occurs when any of the enabled Motor Winding Temperatures exceeds the following:[High Winding Temperature Shutdown threshold - 18°F] for 3 continuous seconds. This warningwill automatically clear when all winding temperatures decrease below the warning threshold.The value programmed for the above threshold is displayed as High Winding TemperatureShutdown on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen. It is programmed with the Winding Setup Setpointon that screen. This warning not occur when the Winding Temperature Protection Setpoint isset to Disabled on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. Also, it will not act on any RTD input registeringas an open RTD or any individual winding temperature sensor that has been disabled with theTemperature Disable Setpoint on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen.

Warning – Motor – High Bearing TemperatureThis warning occurs when either of the enabled motor bearing temperatures exceeds theprogrammed High Bearing Temperature Warning for 3 continuous seconds. This warning willautomatically clear when all bearing temperatures decrease below the warning threshold. Thevalue programmed for this threshold is displayed as High Bearing Temperature Warning on theMOTOR SETPOINTS Screen. It is programmed with the Bearing Setup Setpoint on that screen. Thiswarning not occur when the Bearing Temperature Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled on theMOTOR DETAILS Screen. Also, it will not act on any RTD input registering as an open RTD.

Warning – Motor – Bearing Vibration Baseline Not SetDisplayed until both the Shaft End and Opposite Shaft End motor bearing vibration baseline valuesare entered on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. This can be done either manually with the ManualBaseline Setpoint or automatically with the AUTO BASELINE key on that screen. While this messageis displayed, the vibration baseline values are set to X.X.


Warning – Motor – High Bearing VibrationEither the Shaft End or Opposite Shaft End motor bearing vibration has exceeded the valueprogrammed for the High Vibration Warning Setpoint for the programmed number of Delayseconds. The warning will automatically clear when both vibration values decrease below thewarning threshold. This warning does not occur when the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint is setto Disabled on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen or while the WARNING – MOTOR – BEARING VIBRATIONBASELINE NOT SET warning is displayed.

Routine shutdown messagesRemote StopA shutdown command has been received from a remote device. Remote stop commands can bereceived in Digital Remote mode via I/O Board TB4-7/8 or in ISN (BAS) Remote mode via the SC-EQ communication card serial communications. If the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down the chiller.

Local StopA local shutdown command has been received by pressing the Soft Stop Key on the Home screen.

Place Compressor Switch In Run PositionThe Control Center is in either Digital or ISN (BAS) Remote mode. The Operator is requested topress the Start Key on the Home Screen. As a safety measure the Control Center will not accept aRemote start/stop command unless the Start key is initially pressed.

Cycling shutdown messagesMultiunit Cycling – Contacts OpenThe Multiunit Cycling contacts connected to I/O Board TB4-9, have opened to initiate a cyclingshutdown. If the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven fully closedprior to shutting down the chiller. The chiller will automatically restart when the contacts close.

System Cycling – Contacts OpenThe System Cycling contacts connected to I/O Board TB4-13, have opened to initiate a cyclingshutdown. If the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven fully closedprior to shutting down the chiller. The chiller will automatically restart when the contacts close.

Oil – Low Temperature DifferentialThe chiller is prevented from starting because for one of the following reasons. The chiller willautomatically restart when the conditions have been satisfied. This condition is only checked whilethe chiller is stopped. In previous software versions, it is checked when stopped and during the first10 seconds of prelube.

The chiller has been shut down for less than or equal to 30 minutes and the oil temperature minusthe condenser saturation temperature is less than 30°F.

-OR-

The chiller has been shut down for greater than 30 minutes and the oil temperature minus thecondenser saturation temperature is less than 40°F.

-OR-

Following a power failure, upon restoration of power, the oil temperature minus the condensersaturation temperature is less than 40°F.


Oil – Low TemperatureThe oil temperature has decreased to less than 55°F. The chiller will automatically restart whenthe temperature increases to greater than 55°F and is greater than the Condenser Saturatedtemperature by 30 or 40°F, as described above in the Oil – Low Temperature Differential messagedescription.

Control Panel – Power FailureA Control Power failure has occurred. If the power failure occurred while the chiller was running, itwill automatically restart when power is restored. However, if the power failure duration was lessthan the duration of the applicable coastdown period (2.5 minutes standard; 15 minutes steamturbine) when power is restored, the remainder of the coastdown will be performed, prior to thechiller starting. This message can indicate a Cycling (auto-restart after power failure) or Safety(manual restart after power failure) shutdown, depending upon Control Center configuration.It indicates a cycling shutdown when displayed in orange characters; safety shutdown whendisplayed in red characters. The Control Center is configured for auto-restart or manual restartafter power failure by a qualified Service Technician.

Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low TemperatureThe Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature has decreased to the programmed Shutdown TemperatureSetpoint. If the chiller is running when this occurs, the Pre- Rotation Vanes are driven fully closedprior to shutting down the chiller. The chiller will automatically restart when the temperatureincreases to the programmed Restart Temperature Setpoint.

Leaving Chilled Liquid – Flow Switch OpenThe Chilled Liquid Flow Switch has remained open for 5 continuous seconds while the chiller wasrunning or failed to close during the System Prelube period. The chiller will automatically restartwhen the flow switch closes.

While this cycling shutdown is active, the evaporator pump relay contacts (TB2-44/45) remainclosed until the chiller is given a stop command or has another fault.

Condenser – Flow Switch OpenThe condenser water flow switch has remained open for 30 continuous seconds while the chillerwas running. This check is bypassed for the first 30 seconds of System Run. The chiller willautomatically restart when the flow switch closes.

While this cycling shutdown is active, the condenser pump contacts (TB2-150/151) remain closeduntil the chiller is given a stop command or has another fault.

Motor Controller – Contacts OpenThe CM-2 Current Module (Electromechanical starter applications) or Solid State Starter LogicBoard (Mod “A” Solid State Starter applications) has shutdown the chiller. When detecting a faultcondition that places the starter or motor at risk, these devices open the Motor Controller contacts“CM” (located on the respective device and connected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in the ControlCenter) to initiate a shutdown. Since there are several different faults that are monitored, LED’son the respective device illuminate to identify the specific fault that has occurred. Refer to SolidState Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.46-OM3.1) for details of Mod “A” SolidState Starter initiated shutdowns and the OptiView Control Center Service Manual for CM-2 initiatedshutdowns. The chiller will automatically restart when the Motor Controller contacts close. On someshutdowns, the respective device automatically closes the contacts when the fault condition clears.Other shutdowns require the Operator to perform a Manual Reset at the respective device.


Table 199: Manual and automatic shutdown resetsDevice Manual reset fault Automatic reset fault

Overload NoneCM-2 Module

Overload Phase Rotation/LossHigh Temp (more than 212°F) High Temp start inhibit (more than 110°F)

Solid State StarterFault Current Trigger Board Out-of-Lock

Motor Controller – Loss Of CurrentThe Compressor Motor current decreased to 10% Full Load Amps (FLA) for 25 continuous secondswhile the chiller was running. This could be caused by the starter de-energizing during run or adefect in the motor current feedback circuitry to the Control Center. The chiller will automaticallyrestart at the completion of System Coastdown.

Power FaultThe CM-2 Current Module (Electro-Mechanical Starter applications) or Solid State Starter LogicBoard (Mod “A” Solid State Starter applications) has shutdown the chiller because it detected afault condition that places the motor at risk. These devices open and close the Motor Controller“CM” contacts (located on the respective device and connected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in theControl Center) in less than 3 seconds to initiate the shutdown and produce this message. An LEDon the respective device illuminates to identify the specific fault that has occurred. Refer to SolidState Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.46-OM3.1) for details of Solid StateStarter initiated shutdowns and OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1) forCM-2 initiated shutdowns. The chiller will automatically restart when the contacts close.

Table 200: Device shutdownDevice ShutdownCM-2 Module Power FaultSolid State Starter Power Fault

Half Phase

Control Panel – ScheduleThe programmed Daily Schedule Setpoint has shutdown the chiller. If this occurs while the chiller isrunning, the Pre-Rotation Vanes are driven fully closed prior to shutting down the chiller. The chillerwill automatically restart at the next scheduled start time.

Starter – Low Supply Line Voltage (Mod “A” Solid State Starter)The voltage in any phase of the AC Power Line Voltage supplying the Solid State Starter hasdecreased to the low line voltage threshold for 20 continuous seconds. The chiller will automaticallyrestart when the voltage returns to the restart level. The thresholds are as follows:

Table 201: Voltage thresholdsSupply voltagerange (Volts)

Shutdown(volts)

Restart(volts)

380 305 331400 320 349415 335 362


Table 201: Voltage thresholdsSupply voltagerange (Volts)

Shutdown(volts)

Restart(volts)

440-480 370 400550-600 460 502

Supply VoltageRange disabled None N/A

Starter – High Supply Line Voltage (Mod “A” Solid State Starter)The voltage in any phase of the AC Power Line Voltage supplying the Solid State Starter hasincreased to the high line voltage threshold for 20 continuous seconds. The chiller will automaticallyrestart when the voltage returns to the restart level. The thresholds are as follows:

Table 202: Voltage thresholdsSupply voltage range (Volts) Shutdown (Volts) Restart (Volts)

380 415 414400 436 435415 454 453

440-480 524 523550-600 655 654

Supply Voltage Range disabled None N/A

Proximity Probe – Low Supply VoltageThis message indicates the +24VDC power supply voltage to the Proximity Probe has decreasedto +19VDC. This is below the minimum level required for reliable operation. The chiller willautomatically restart when the voltage increases to greater than or equal to 19.7VDC.

Oil – Variable Speed Pump – Drive Contacts OpenThe Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive has shut down the chiller by opening its status contactsconnected to the I/O Board TB3-70. The Drive initiates a shutdown anytime its internal protectioncircuits will not permit the Drive to run. The contacts remain open until its internal protectioncircuits are satisfied it is safe to operate. Some Drive initiated shutdowns require AC Power to becycled to clear the fault. The chiller will automatically restart when the contacts close.

Mod “B” Solid State Starter cycling shutdown messagesLCSSS Initialization FailedWhen AC Power is restored to the system after a power failure, an initialization processoccurs wherein the Control Center attempts to establish communications through the serialcommunications link with the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter. If communications are notestablished within 10 consecutive attempts, a cycling shutdown is performed and this message isdisplayed. The Control Center attempts to establish communications until successful.

LCSSS – Serial CommunicationsAfter communications have been successfully established in the Initialization process, theControl Center initiates a data transmission to the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter on the serialcommunications link every 2 seconds. After these communications have been established, if theControl Center does not receive a reply within 10 consecutive attempts, a cycling shutdown isperformed and this message is displayed. This same cycling shutdown is performed, along with the


same message, if the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter does not receive a response from the ControlCenter after 10 consecutive attempts to communicate with the Control Center after Initializationhas been successfully completed. The Control Center attempts to establish communications untilsuccessful.

LCSSS Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data...The Liquid Cooled State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has shut down the chiller but the ControlCenter has not yet received the cause of the fault from the LCSSS, via the serial communicationslink. The LCSSS shuts down the chiller by opening the Motor Controller LCSSS Stop Contacts (K1relay located on the starter Logic/Trigger Board and connected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in theControl Center). The Microboard, in the Control Center then sends a request for the cause of thefault to the Logic/Trigger Board over the serial communications link. Since serial communicationsare initiated every 2 seconds, this message is typically displayed for a few seconds and thenreplaced with one of the following fault messages.

LCSSS – Stop Contacts OpenRefer to LCSSS Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data. If the Control Center’s Microboard does not receivethe cause of a starter initiated shutdown with 20 seconds of the shutdown, it is assumed it is notforthcoming and that message is replaced with this message. The chiller can be started when theMotor Controller LCSSS Stop Contacts close.

A missing interlock jumper between Starter Logic/ Trigger Board J1-1 and J1-12 will also producethis message.

LCSSS – Power FaultThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected that the compressor motorcurrent in one or more phases has decreased to less than 10% of the FLA for a minimum of 1 linecycle. This check is inhibited during the first 4 seconds of System Run and until the motor currentis greater than 25% of the Job FLA. The chiller will automatically restart upon completion of SystemCoastdown.

LCSSS – Low Phase (X) Temperature SensorThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected that the temperature of thestarter phase A, B or C (designated as X in the message) Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) Modulehas decreased to less than 37°F. This would generally be indicative of a disconnected or defectivesensor. If all three SCR Modules are indicating a temperature of less than 37°F, the SCR Modulecooling pump turns on. This is accomplished by disconnecting all three sensors. This feature allowsService Technicians to run the cooling pump while filling the cooling system by disconnecting plugsP2, P3 and P4 in the LCSSS.

LCSSS – Run SignalThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter receives two start signals from the Control Centersimultaneously; one via the serial communications link and one via the start relay TB6-24 in theControl Center. If they are not received within 5 seconds of one another, a cycling shutdown isperformed and this message is displayed. This is generally indicative of defective wiring.

LCSSS – Invalid Current Scale SelectionThere is an invalid compressor motor current scale jumper combination installed in the LiquidCooled Solid Starter Logic/Trigger Board J1. Jumper combination determines allowable “100% FLA”setpoint range; 7L-35 to 260A, 14L-65 to 510A, 26L-125 to 850A and 33L-215 to 1050A. The chiller willbe permitted to start when the jumpers are configured correctly. Refer to Solid State Starter (Mod“B”) – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.00-O2) for valid jumper configurations.


LCSSS – Phase Locked LoopThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board phase locked loop circuit was not able tomaintain lock with phase A of the power line. This could be caused by a power line anomaly suchas sag or jitter. A power line frequency jitter of up to 3 Hz/second can be tolerated. The chiller willautomatically restart when lock has resumed.

LCSSS – Low Supply Line VoltageThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected that the compressor motorAC Power Line Voltage, in any phase, decreased below the low line voltage threshold continuouslyfor 20 seconds. The chiller will automatically restart when the voltage in all phases returns to therestart level. The thresholds are as follows:

Table 203: Voltage thresholdsSupply voltagerange (Volts) Shutdown (Volts) Restart (Volts)

Disabled None N/A200-208 160 174220-240 185 200

380 305 331400 320 349415 335 362

440-480 370 400550-600 460 502

LCSSS – High Supply Line VoltageThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected that the compressor motorAC Power Line Voltage, in any phase, exceeded the high line voltage threshold continuously for 20seconds. The chiller will automatically restart when the voltage in all phases returns to the restartlevel. The thresholds are as follows:

Table 204: Voltage thresholdsSupply voltagerange (Volts) Shutdown (Volts) Restart (Volts)

Disabled None N/A200-208 227 226220-240 262 261

380 415 414400 436 435415 454 453

440-480 524 523550-600 655 654

LCSSS – Logic Board ProcessorCommunication between the V25 Microprocessor and Digital Signal Processor (DSP) on the LiquidCooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has been interrupted. The chiller will automaticallyrestart when communications are restored.


LCSSS – Logic Board Power SupplyFollowing application of power, this message is displayed and a snapshot of the LCSSS parametersand time of power failure are sent to the Control Center.

LCSSS – Phase Rotation/LossThe Liquid Cooled Solid Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected the three-phase compressormotor power line voltage phase rotation is not correct or the line-to-line voltage in any phase hasdecreased to less than 30% of nominal. The chiller will automatically restart when the power lineconditions are acceptable.

LCSSS – Phase LossThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected the line-to-line RMS voltagein any phase has decreased to less than or equal to 30% of the lowest value of the programedvoltage range. If the programmed voltage range is Disabled, a value of 60VAC is used as thethreshold. The chiller will automatically restart when the line voltage is greater than the shutdownthreshold. The voltage range is programmed by a Service Technician following instructions inOptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).

Compressor motor variable speed drive: Cycling shutdownmessagesThe following cycling shutdown messages are displayed on Compressor Motor Variable SpeedDrive (VSD) applications only. These messages are generated by events that occur within the VSD.The chiller will automatically restart when the cycling condition clears. Service and troubleshootinginformation is contained in Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M1).VSD Shutdown – Requesting Fault DataThe VSD has shutdown the chiller and the Control Center has not yet received the cause of the faultfrom the VSD, via the serial communications link. The VSD shuts down the chiller by opening theMotor Controller VSD STOP CONTACTS (located on the VSD Logic Board and connected betweenTB6-16 and TB6-53 in the Control Center). The Microboard in the Control Center then sends arequest for the cause of the fault to the VSD Logic Board via the Adaptive Capacity Control Board,over the serial link. Since serial communications are initiated every 2 seconds, this message istypically displayed for a few seconds and then replaced with one of the below listed fault messages.

VSD – Stop Contacts OpenRefer to VSD Shutdown – Requesting Fault Data. If the Control Center’s Microboard does not receivethe cause of the fault over the Serial Link within 20 seconds, it is assumed it is not forthcoming andthat message is replaced with VSD – STOP CONTACTS OPEN message.

VSD Initialization FailedUpon application of power, all boards go through the initialization process. At this time, memorylocations are cleared, program jumper positions are checked and serial communications links areestablished. There are several causes for an unsuccessful initialization as follows:

• The Control Center and the VSD must be energized at the same time. The practice ofpulling the fuse in the Control Center to remove power from the Control Center will create aproblem. Power-up must be accomplished by closing the main disconnect on the VSD cabinetwith all fuses in place. A power interruption to the VSD Logic Board will also generate thismessage.

• The EPROMs must be of the correct version for each VSD board and they must be installedcorrectly. The EPROMs are created as a set, and cannot be interchanged between earlier andlater versions.


• Serial data communications must be established. Refer to VSD – Serial Communications in thissection. If communications between the VSD Logic Board, Harmonic Filter Logic Board, ACCBoard and Control Center Microboard does not take place during initialization, this messagewill be generated. The serial communications can be verified by selecting the VSD DETAILSScreen from the MOTOR Screen and observing the Full Load Amps value. A zero displayed forthis and other VSD parameters, indicates a serial communications link problem.

• If the Harmonic Filter option is included, make sure the Filter Logic Board is not in continuousreset. This condition is evidenced by the Filter Logic Board’s LED’s alternately blinking. Thefilter can be eliminated as a cause of initialization failure by disconnecting the filter by placingswitch SW1 on the Filter Logic Board in the OFF position and removing the ribbon cablebetween the Filter Logic Board and the VSD Logic Boards.

• VSD and Harmonic Filter horsepower ratings do not agree.

VSD – High Phase A Instantaneous CurrentThis shutdown is generated by the VSD if the motor current in phase “A” exceeds a given limit.The motor current is sensed by the current transformers on the VSD output pole assemblies andthe signals are sent to the VSD Logic Board for processing. Maximum instantaneous permissiblecurrents are:

• 351/292 HP equals 771 Amps• 503/419 HP equals 1200 Amps• 790/658 HP equals 1890 Amps

If an over current trip occurs, but the chiller restarts and runs without a problem, the cause maybe attributed to a voltage sag on the utility power feeding the VSD that is in excess of the specifiedvoltage range for this product. Thus is especially true if the chiller was running at, or near full load.If there should be a sudden dip in line voltage, the current to the motor will increase, since themotor wants to draw constant horsepower. The chiller Pre-Rotation Vanes cannot close quicklyenough to correct for this sudden increase in current, and the chiller will trip on an over currentfault.

If the chiller will not restart, but keeps tripping on this same shutdown, an output pole problem isthe most likely cause. The VSD would require service under these conditions.

If this cycling shutdown occurs 3 times in 10 minutes, the third shutdown becomes a safetyshutdown.

VSD – High Phase B Instantaneous CurrentSee High Phase A Instantaneous Current message above.

VSD – High Phase C Instantaneous CurrentSee High Phase A Instantaneous Current message above.

VSD – Phase A Gate DriverA second level of current protection exists on the VSD driver boards themselves. The collector-to-emitter saturation voltage of each IGBT is checked continuously while the device is gated on. Ifthe voltage across the IGBT is greater than a set threshold, the IGBT is gated off and a shutdownpulse is sent to the VSD Logic Board shutting down the entire VSD system. A gate driver fault can beinitiated when the VSD is not running.

VSD – Phase B Gate DriverSee Phase A Gate Driver message above.


VSD – Phase C Gate DriverSee Phase A Gate Driver message above.

VSD – Single Phase Input PowerThis shutdown is generated by the SCR trigger control and relayed to the VSD Logic Board toinitiate a system shutdown. The SCR Trigger control uses circuitry to detect the loss of any one ofthe three input phases. The Trigger will detect the loss of a phase within one half line cycle of thephase loss. This message is also displayed every time power to the VSD is removed or if the inputpower dips to a very low level.

VSD – High DC Bus VoltageThe VSD’s DC Link Voltage is continuously monitored and if the level exceeds 745VDC, a Bus Over-Voltage shutdown is initiated. If this shutdown occurs, it will be necessary to look at the level of the460VAC applied to the drive. The specified voltage range is 414 to 508VAC. If the incoming voltage isin excess of 508VAC, steps should be taken to reduce the voltage to within the specified limits.

VSD – Logic Board Power SupplyThis shutdown is generated by the VSD Logic Board and it indicates that the low voltage powersupplies for the Logic Boards have dropped below their allowable operating limits. The powersupplies for the Logic Boards are derived from the secondary of the 120 to 24VAC transformer,which in turn, is derived from the 480 to 120VAC control power transformer. This message usuallymeans the power to the VSD has been removed.

VSD – Low DC Bus VoltageIf the DC link drops below 500VDC (or 414VDC for 50 Hz applications), the drive will initiate a systemshutdown. A common cause for this shutdown is a severe sag in the incoming power to the drive.Monitor the incoming three-phase AC line for severe sags and also monitor the DC link with avoltmeter.

VSD – Low DC Bus Voltage(575V/60 Hz applications)

If the DC Link Voltage falls below 600VDC while running, this shutdown is performed.

VSD – DC Bus Voltage ImbalanceThe DC link is filtered by many large electrolytic capacitors, rated for 450VDC. These capacitorsare wired in series to achieve 900VDC capability for the DC link. It is important that the voltage beshared equally from the junction of the center, or series capacitor connection, to the negative busand the positive bus. This center point should be approximately ½ of the total DC Link Voltage. Mostactual Bus Voltage Imbalance conditions are caused by a shorted capacitor or a leaky or shortedIGBT transistor in an output phase bank assembly. This usually indicates the VSD requires service.

VSD – DC Bus Voltage Imbalance(575V/60 Hz applications)

If the Half DC Link Voltage does not remain within plus or minus 106VDC of the DC Link Voltagedivided by 2 while running, this shutdown is performed.

VSD – Precharge – DC Bus Voltage ImbalanceThis message indicates the same as the VSD-DC Bus Voltage Imbalance message above, except thecondition occurred during the prelube period.

VSD – Precharge-DC Bus Voltage Imbalance(575V/60 Hz applications)


If the Half DC Link Voltage does not remain within plus or minus 106VDC of the DC Link Voltagedivided by 2 during the pre-charge interval, this shutdown is performed.

VSD – High Internal Ambient TemperatureThe ambient temperature monitored is actually the temperature detected by a componentmounted on the VSD Logic Board. The high ambient trip threshold is set for 140°F. Some potentialcauses for this shutdown are: internal VSD fan failure, VSD water pump failure or an enteringcondenser water temperature that exceeds the allowable limit for the job. Additional causes for theshutdown are:

• Plugged Strainer – The standard 1.5" Y-strainer contains a woven mesh element with 20stainless steel wires per inch. This has been found to work adequately on most applications.Some users may have very dirty condenser water, which can cause the strainer to plug.Locations with special conditions may want to consider a dual strainer arrangement withquarter turn valves, to permit cleaning of one strainer with the unit still on line.

• Plugged Heat-exchanger – In cases where the strainer plugs frequently, the heat-exchangermay eventually plug or become restricted to the point of reduced flow. At this point, wesuggest you back-flush the heat-exchanger by reversing the two rubber hoses which supplycondenser water to-from the heat-exchanger. If the rust cannot be back-flushed the heat-exchanger might have to be replaced.

• Low Condenser Flow – The VSD system requires 8 feet of pressure drop across the heatexchanger to maintain adequate GPM. If the pressure drop is less than 8 feet, it will benecessary to correct the flow problem or add a booster pump as is applied on retrofit chillers.

VSD – Invalid Current Scale SelectionSince the part number of the VSD Logic Board is the same on all horsepower sizes, the positionof Program Jumpers tells the Logic Board the size of the VSD employed. This allows the VSD toproperly scale the output current. If the jumper configuration is invalid, a shutdown is performedand this message is generated. Refer to Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M1).

VSD – Low Phase A Inverter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)

A heatsink temperature sensor indicating a temperature less than 37°F will cause the chiller to shutdown and display this message. In most cases, the problem will be an open transmitter or brokenwiring to the transmitter. The normal transmitter resistance is 10K ohms at 77°F.

VSD – Low Phase B Inverter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)

See Low Phase A Inverter Heatsink Temperature message above.

VSD – Low Phase C Inverter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)

See Low Phase A Inverter Heatsink Temperature message above.

VSD – Low Converter Heatsink TemperatureIf VSD part number is 371-02767-XXX (60 Hz) or 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz), a heatsink temperaturesensor indicating a temperature of less than 37°F will cause the chiller to shutdown and displaythis message. In most cases, the problem will be an open transmitter or broken wiring to thetransmitter. The normal transmitter resistance is 10K ohms at 77°F.

VSD – Low Phase A Inverter Baseplate Temperature(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503 HP 60 Hz; 419 HP 50 Hz)


The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has decreased to less than 37°F.

VSD – Low Phase B Inverter Baseplate TemperatureThe chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has decreased to less than 37°F.

VSD – Low Phase C Inverter Baseplate Temperature(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503 HP 60 Hz; 419 HP 50 Hz))

The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has decreased to less than 37°F.

VSD – Precharge – Low DC Bus VoltageDuring pre-charge, the DC link must be equal to or greater than 50VDC (41VDC for 50 Hz) within ½second and 500VDC within 15 seconds after the pre-charge relay is energized. If this condition isnot met, a shutdown is performed and this message is generated.

VSD – Precharge – Low DC Bus Voltage(575V/60 Hz applications)

If the DC Link Voltage does not reach at least 60VDC (within 4 seconds) or at least 600VDC (within 20seconds) after the precharge command has been received, this shutdown is performed.

VSD – Low Inverter Baseplate Temperature(Applicable to VSD with part number 371-02767-XXX (60 Hz) or 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz))

A baseplate temperature sensor indicating a temperature of less than 37°F will cause the chillerto shut down and display this message. In most cases, the problem will be an open transmitter orbroken wiring to the transmitter. The normal transmitter resistance is 5K ohms at 77°F.

VSD – Logic Board ProcessorThis shutdown is generated if a communications problem occurs between the two microprocessorson the VSD Logic Board.

VSD – Run SignalRedundant Run Signals are generated by the Control Center; one via TB6-24 and the second viathe serial communications link. Upon receipt of either of the two Run Commands by the VSD, a5 second timer will commence timing. If both Run Commands are not received by the VSD LogicBoard within 5 seconds, a shutdown is performed and this message is displayed. This is generallyindicative of a wiring problem between the Control Center and the VSD.

VSD – Serial CommunicationsThis message is generated when communications between the Control Center Microboard and theVSD Logic Board is disrupted. This is generally indicative of defective wiring.

Harmonic Filter – Logic Board or CommunicationsThis message is generated when communications between the Harmonic Filter and the VSD LogicBoard is disrupted. The communications must be interrupted for 10 continuous communicationscycles (20 seconds) before the shutdown will occur.

Harmonic Filter – High DC Bus VoltageThe Harmonic Filter’s DC Link Voltage is continuously monitored and if the level exceeds 860VDC,this shutdown is performed. The Harmonic Filter has its own DC bus as part of the filter powerassembly, and this DC Link is not connected in any way with the VSD’s DC link. If this shutdownoccurs, it will be necessary to look at the level of 460VAC applied to the Harmonic Filter. Thespecified voltage range is 414 to 508. If the incoming voltage is in excess of 508, steps should betaken to reduce the level to within specified limits. The cause of this message is typically high linevoltage or a surge on the utility supply.


Harmonic Filter – High Phase A CurrentThe maximum instantaneous Harmonic Filter current is monitored and compared to a preset limit.If this limit is exceeded, a shutdown is performed and this message is generated. The filter currentis monitored using two DCCT’s and these signals are processed by the Filter Logic Board. Thepreset limits are as follows:

• 351/292 HP equals 356 Amps• 503/419 HP equals 496 Amps• 790/658 HP equals 745 Amps• 1048/917 HP equals 385 Amps

If the VSD automatically restarts after this shutdown and continues to operate properly with thefilter operating, it is likely the filter tripped due to a sag or surge in the voltage feeding the VSD. Ifthis message reoccurs, preventing the chiller from starting, the VSD will require service.

Harmonic Filter – High Phase B CurrentSee Harmonic Filter – High Phase A Current message above.

Harmonic Filter – High Phase C CurrentSee Harmonic Filter – High Phase A Current message above.

Harmonic Filter – Phase Locked LoopThis shutdown indicates that a circuit called Phase Locked Loop on the Filter Logic Board has lostsynchronization with the incoming power line. This is usually indicative of an open fuse in one ofthe filter’s incoming power line. Filter power fuses 11FU, 12FU and 13FU should be checked.

Harmonic Filter – Precharge – Low DC Bus VoltageDuring pre-charge, the Filter’s DC link must be equal to or greater than 50VDC (41VDC for 50 Hz)within 1/10 second after the pre-charge relay is energized. If this condition is not met, a shutdownis performed and this message is generated.

VSD – Harmonic Filter-Precharge-Low DC Bus Voltage(575V/60 Hz applications)

If the DC Link Voltage does not reach at least 60VDC (within 100 milliseconds) or at least 630VDC(within 5 seconds) after the filter precharge command has been received, this shutdown isperformed.

Harmonic Filter – Low DC Bus VoltageThe Harmonic Filter generates its own Filter DC link Voltage by switching its IGBT’s. This DC levelis actually higher than the level that one could obtain by simply rectifying the input line voltage.Thus, the Harmonic Filter actually performs a voltage BOOST function. This is necessary in order topermit current to flow into the power line from the filter when the input line is at its peak level. Thisshutdown occurs when the Filter’s DC Link Voltage decreases to a level less than 60VDC below theFilter DC Link Voltage setpoint. This Setpoint is determined by the Filter Logic Board via the sensingof the three phase input line-to-line voltage. This setpoint is set to the peak of the sensed input line-to-line voltage plus 32 volts, not to exceed 760 volts and it varies with the input line-to-line voltage.If this shutdown occurs occasionally, the likely cause is a severe sag in the input line voltage.

Harmonic Filter – DC Bus Voltage ImbalanceThe Filter DC link is filtered by large, electrolytic capacitors, rated for 450VDC. These capacitors arewired in series to achieve a 900VDC capability for the DC link. It is important the voltage is sharedequally from the junction of the center or series capacitor connection, to the negative bus and tothe positive bus. This center point should be approximately ½ of the total DC Link Voltage.


VSD – Harmonic Filter-DC Bus Voltage ImbalanceIf the Half DC Link Voltage does not remain within plus or minus 63VDC of the DC Link Voltagedivided by 2, this shutdown is performed.

Harmonic Filter – Input Current OverloadThe three phases of RMS Filter current are monitored. If any one of the three phases continuouslyexceeds a given threshold for 7 seconds, a chiller shutdown is performed and this message isdisplayed. The maximum permissible continuous RMS current ratings for the Harmonic Filter are:

• 351/292 HP equals 128 Amps• 503/419 HP equals 176 Amps• 790/658 HP equals 277 Amps• 1048/917 HP equals 385 Amps

Harmonic Filter – Logic Board Power SupplyThe low voltage power supplies on the Filter Logic Board have decreased below their permissibleoperating range. The Filter Logic Board receives its power from the VSD Logic Board via the ribboncable, connecting the two boards.

Harmonic Filter – Run SignalWhen a digital run command is received at the Filter Logic Board from the VSD Logic Board viathe 16 position ribbon cable, a 1/10 second timer is started. If a redundant run command doesnot occur on the serial data link from the VSD Logic Board before the timer expires, a shutdown isperformed and this message is generated.

Harmonic Filter – DC Current Transformer 1During initialization, with no current flowing through the DC Current Transformers (DCCT’s), theDCCT output voltages are measured and compared with a preset limit via the Filter Logic Board. Ifthe measured values exceed the preset limits, the DCCT’s are presumed to be defective and thisshutdown is generated.

Harmonic Filter – DC Current Transformer 2See Harmonic Filter – DC Current Transformer 1 message above.

Safety shutdown messagesEvaporator – Low PressureThe Evaporator Pressure, as sensed by the Evaporator transducer, has decreased to the safetyshutdown threshold. For water cooling applications, the safety shutdown threshold is a fixed valuefor the respective refrigerant. For Brine cooling applications, the safety shutdown threshold variesaccording to the concentration of the Brine solution. The Brine shutdown threshold is programmedat the YORK Factory. It should not be changed by anyone other than a qualified Service Technicianfollowing instructions in OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1). The chillercan be started after the Evaporator Pressure increases to the restart threshold and the CompressorSwitch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.


Table 205: Evaporator pressure thresholds

Shutdown (PSIG) Restart (PSIG)Water Cooling - R22 54.3 54.4

- R134a 25.0 25.1Brine Cooling - R22 25.0 to 54.3 as programmed +0.1 more than Shutdown threshold

- R134a 6.0 to 25.0 as programmed +0.1 more than Shutdown threshold

Evaporator – Low Pressure - Smart FreezeSmart Freeze protection is activated and has shutdown the chiller because the evaporatortemperature has been below the Smart Freeze threshold for greater than the allowable numberof seconds. If the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature sensor RT7 is enabled, (using procedurein OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1)), this parameter is used as theEvaporator Refrigerant Temperature and the freeze threshold is 32.8°F. If RT7 is not enabled, theEvaporator Refrigerant Temperature used is the Evaporator Saturation Temperature, derived fromthe Evaporator Pressure transducer and the freeze threshold is 34.0°F.

The total count is incremented once for every second the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature isbelow the freeze threshold (but is never decremented below zero). The number of seconds it willtake the chilled liquid to freeze is based on how far the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature isbelow the freeze threshold as follows:

number of secondsto freezing

=(4053.7)

freeze threshold - evap. refrigerant temp.

Smart Freeze is activated only if the feature has been enabled by a Service Technician (followinginstructions in OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1)) and the LeavingChilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint is less than 38.0°F.

Evaporator – Transducer Or Leaving Liquid ProbeA possible defective Evaporator Pressure transducer or Leaving Chilled Liquid temperaturetransmitter has been detected. The pressure and temperature that these devices are indicatingare not in the correct relationship to each other. The Control Center converts the EvaporatorPressure to a Saturated Temperature value and compares this value to the Leaving Chilled Liquidtemperature (difference equals chilled liquid temp minus evaporator saturated temp). Thedifference should not be outside the range of –2.5°F to +25.0°F. If the transducer and transmitterare accurate, the Evaporator Saturated temperature should not be greater than 2.5°F warmernor greater than 25.0°F colder than the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature. In order to initiate ashutdown, the difference must be outside the acceptable range continuously for 10 minutes. Thechiller can be started after the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Evaporator – Transducer Or Temperature SensorA possible defective Evaporator Pressure transducer or Refrigerant Temperature Sensor hasbeen detected. The Control Center converts the Evaporator Pressure to a Saturated Temperaturevalue and compares this value to the optional Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature Sensor. Ifthe difference between these temperatures is greater than 3.0°F, continuously for 1 minute, thisshutdown is performed. This check is only performed under the following conditions:

• Chiller has been running for at least 10 minutes


• Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature (RT7) has been enabled by a Service Technician usinginstructions in OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1)

• Not in Brine Cooling mode• Smart Freeze is enabled.• Evaporator Temperature Sensor (RT7) or Evaporator Saturation Temperature is indicating a

temperature of less than 32.0°F

The chiller can be started after the temperatures are within 3.0°F of one another and the Operatorpresses the WARNING RESET button.

Condenser – High Pressure Contacts OpenThe contacts of the electro-mechanical high pressure safety device, located on the condenser shell,have opened because this device has detected a pressure:

• more than 204 PSIG (R134a)

The contacts will automatically close when the condenser pressure decreases to:

• less than 160 PSIG (R134a)

The chiller can be started after the contacts close and the Operator presses the WARNING RESETbutton.

Condenser – High PressureThe condenser pressure, as sensed by the Condenser transducer, has increased to:

• more than 180.0 PSIG (R134a)• more than 265.0 PSIG (R22)

The chiller can be started after the pressure decreases to:

• less than 120.0 PSIG (R134a)• less than 205 PSIG (R22) and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

For special order R134a high condenser temperature chiller applications, the CondenserTemperature Range Setpoint is set to Extended. The trip/reset threshold is then 200/140 PSIG.

Condenser – High Pressure – StoppedThe condenser pressure exceeded 160.0 PSIG (R134a), 240.0 PSIG (R22) while the chiller wasstopped. High temperature condenser water flowing through the condenser while the chiller isshutdown can cause a condenser high pressure condition resulting in loss of refrigerant. This safetyfault anticipates this problem by annunciating the condenser high pressure condition. The chillercan be restarted after a Service Technician performs a special reset preset procedure contained inOptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).

For special order R134a high condenser temperature chiller applications, the CondenserTemperature Range Setpoint is set to Extended. The trip/reset is then 170/170 PSIG .

Condenser – Pressure Transducer Out Of RangeThe Condenser Pressure transducer is indicating a pressure that is:

• less than 6.8 PSIG (R134a)• less than 24.2 PSIG (R22)• or more than 300.0 PSIG (R134a or R22)


This is outside the normal operating range of the transducer. This is generally indicates a defectivetransducer. The chiller can be started after the transducer is indicating a pressure that is withinrange and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Auxiliary Safety – Contacts ClosedThe Auxiliary safety shutdown contacts, connected to I/O Board TB4-31 have closed, initiating asafety shutdown. This input is a general-purpose, user defined safety shutdown input. The chillercan be started after the contacts open and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Discharge – High TemperatureThe discharge temperature, as sensed by the Discharge Temperature Transmitter, has increased togreater than 220.0°F. The chiller can be started after the temperature decreases to less than 220.0°Fand the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Discharge – Low TemperatureThe discharge temperature, as sensed by the Discharge Temperature Transmitter, has decreasedto less than 30.0°F. The chiller can be started after the temperature increases to greater than 30.0°Fand the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Oil – High TemperatureThe oil temperature, as sensed by the Oil Temperature Transmitter, has increased to greater than180.0°F. The chiller can be started after the temperature decreases to less than 180.0°F and theOperator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Oil – Low Differential PressureThe differential oil pressure decreased to less than 15.0 PSID while the chiller was running or failedto achieve 25.0 PSID by the last 5 seconds of the System Prelube period. The differential oil pressureis the difference between the output of the Sump Oil Pressure transducer (system low pressure)and the output of the Pump Oil Pressure transducer (system high pressure). The chiller can bestarted after the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Oil – High Differential PressureThe differential oil pressure increased to greater than 120 while the oil pump was running. Thedifferential oil pressure is the difference between the output of the Sump Oil Pressure transducer(system low pressure) and the output of the Pump Oil Pressure transducer (system high pressure).The chiller can be started after the differential oil pressure decreases to less than 90.0 PSID and theOperator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Oil – Pump Pressure Transducer Out Of RangeThe Pump Oil Pressure transducer (system high pressure) is indicating a pressure that is less than0.0 PSIG or greater than 315.0 PSIG. This is outside the normal operating range of the transducer.This generally indicates a defective transducer. The chiller can be started after the transducer isindicating a pressure that is within range and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Oil – Sump Pressure Transducer Out Of RangeThe Sump Oil Pressure transducer (system low pressure) is indicating a pressure that is outside thenormal operating range of the transducer as follows:

• R134a is less than 0.0 PSIG or more than 315.0 PSIG.• R22 is less than 23.2 PSIG or more than 271.8 PSIG.

This generally indicates a defective transducer. The chiller can be started after the transducer isindicating a pressure that is within range and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.


Oil – Differential Pressure CalibrationThe Sump and Pump oil pressure transducers indicated a differential oil pressure of greater than15.0 PSID during the oil pressure transducer Auto-Zeroing period that begins 10 seconds intoSystem Prelube and lasts for 3 seconds. This is indicative of a defective Sump or Pump transducer,since the oil pump is not running during this period and the actual differential oil pressure is 0PSID. The transducers are sensing the same pressure during this period and their outputs shouldbe similar. The chiller can be started after the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Oil – Variable Speed Pump – Setpoint Not AchievedThis is only applicable to chillers equipped with the Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive. One of thefollowing conditions have occurred while in System Prelube, System Run or System Coastdown. Thechiller can be started after the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button. This safety shutdownis not performed when the Refrigerant Selection (microboard SW1-1) is set to “R22”.

• The differential oil pressure was less than 35.0 PSID for 5 continuous seconds during the last10 seconds of the System Prelube period or during the first 15 seconds of System Run.

-OR-

• Anytime after the first 30 seconds of System Run, the differential oil pressure was less thanthe Oil Pressure Setpoint with the speed command from the Microboard at 60 Hz for 5continuous seconds.

Control Panel – Power FailureA Control Power failure has occurred. If the power failure duration was less than the durationof the applicable coastdown period (240 seconds Default; adjustable 240 to 900), the remainderof the coastdown is performed upon restoration of power. The chiller can be started after theOperator presses the WARNING RESET button. This message can indicate a Cycling (auto-restartafter power failure) or Safety (manual restart after power failure) shutdown, depending uponControl Center configuration. It indicates a cycling shutdown when displayed in orange characters;safety shutdown when displayed in red characters. The Control Center is configured for auto-restartor manual restart after power failure by a qualified Service Technician following instructions inOptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).

Motor Or Starter – Current ImbalanceThe three phase compressor motor current imbalance was greater than 30% continuously for 45seconds. The imbalance is not checked until the chiller has been running for at least 45 secondsand the average of the three phases of motor current is greater than 80% of the programmed 100%chiller Full Load Amps. The average is calculated as:

Iave =(Ia+Ib+Ic)

3

The imbalance is calculated as:

(Ia-Iave)+(Ib-Iave)+(Ic-Iave)2(Iave) x 100

The Style B Solid State Starter and Variable Speed Drive detects the unbalance condition and advisethe OptiView Control Center Microboard via serial communications. The Style A Solid State Starterand Variable Speed Drives returns the 3-phase motor current values to the OptiView Control Center


Microboard where the unbalance calculation is performed. This safety shutdown is not performedon Electro-Mechanical Starter applications.

Thrust Bearing – Proximity Probe ClearanceThe clearance between the compressor high speed thrust collar and the tip of the Proximity Probehas increased more than +10 mils or decreased to less than -25 mils (for 2 continuous seconds)from the Reference Position. The minimum allowed clearance is 23 mils. Therefore, if the Referenceposition is less than 47 mils, the shutdown will occur when the actual clearance is less than 22 mils.

The clearance is only checked during the last 20 seconds of System Prelube, during System Run andduring coastdown. Therefore, the fault is only detected during those periods.

CAUTION

This shutdown must be evaluated by a qualified Service Technician prior to starting the chiller. Startingthe chiller without this evaluation could result in severe compressor damage. To prevent the chillerfrom starting without the proper evaluation, restart is inhibited until the clearance is within acceptablelimits and a special reset procedure is performed by the Service Technician. The evaluation and resetprocedure are contained in OptiView Control Center - Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).

Thrust Bearing – Proximity Probe Out Of RangeThe clearance between the compressor high speed thrust collar and the tip of the Proximity Probehas decreased to less than 17 mils.

The clearance is only checked during the last 20 seconds of System Prelube, during System Run andduring coastdown. Therefore, the fault is only detected during those periods.

CAUTION

This shutdown must be evaluated by a qualified Service Technician prior to starting the chiller. Startingthe chiller without this evaluation could result in severe compressor damage. To prevent the chillerfrom starting without the proper evaluation, restart is inhibited until the clearance is within +10 to -25mils of the Reference Position and a special reset procedure is performed by the Service Technician.The evaluation and reset procedure are contained in OptiView Control Center - Service Instructions (Form160.54-M1).

Thrust Bearing – Limit Switch OpenThe High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch contacts, connected to TB3-81, have opened. Thisoccurs when the Bearing position decreases to less than the allowed position.

CAUTION

This shutdown must be evaluated by a qualified Service Technician prior to starting the chiller. Startingthe chiller without this evaluation could result in severe compressor damage. To prevent the chillerfrom starting without the proper evaluation, restart is inhibited until the switch contacts have closedand a special reset procedure is performed by the Service Technician. The evaluation and resetprocedure are contained in OptiView Control Center - Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).


Watchdog – Software RebootThe Microboard’s software Watchdog initiated a Microprocessor reset because it detected that aportion of the chiller operating program was not being executed. The result of this reset is a safetyshutdown and re-initialization of the program. This is generally indicative of a severe electricalpower disturbance or impending Microboard Failure. The chiller can be started after the Operatorpresses the WARNING RESET button.

Surge Protection – Excess Surge(Applies only if Surge Protection Shutdown feature is Enabled)

The Surge Window Count surge events exceeded the Count Limit Setpoint. If the Surge ProtectionExtended Run feature is Disabled, the chiller shuts down as soon as the count exceeds the limit. Ifthe Extended Run feature is Enabled, this shutdown occurs only if the count exceeds the limit atcompletion of the 10 minute Extended Run period. The chiller can be started after the Operatorpresses the WARNING RESET button.

Motor – Lack of Bearing LubricationThe Operating Hours Since Last Motor Lubrication has exceeded set hours. This message replacesWARNING MOTOR BEARING LUBE REQUIRED above. This safety shutdown remains in effect untilthe Operator presses the WARNING RESET button and enters his/her initials, name or user ID inOPERATOR access level (or higher) using the MOTOR LUBE ACKNOWLEDGE key on the MOTORLUBRICATION Screen. Refer to the Motor lubrication screen for entry instructions. The date andtime of this entry is automatically logged as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication and Time Of LastMotor Lubrication. It also resets the Operating Hours Since Last Lubrication to zero.

The date this warning occurs is stored as the Date Of Last Motor Lubrication Warning Or Fault.This message will only be displayed if the Auto Lube Setpoint is disabled. With this setting, if theShutdown Setpoint is enabled, this safety shutdown will occur. If shutdown is disabled, this warningmessage will be displayed but the safety shutdown will not be performed.

Motor – High Winding TemperatureThis safety shutdown occurs when either of the following conditions are present:

• Any of the enabled Motor Winding Temperatures exceeded the programmed High WindingTemperature Shutdown threshold plus the programmed Winding Hotspot Allowancethreshold for 3 continuous seconds.

-OR-

• The Average Winding Temperature has exceeded the programmed High WindingTemperature Shutdown threshold for 3 continuous seconds.

The values programmed for the above safety thresholds are displayed as High WindingTemperature Shutdown and Winding Hotspot Allowance on the MOTOR SETPOINTS Screen. Theyare programmed with the Winding Setup Setpoint on that screen. The chiller can be started afterall winding temperatures decrease to at least 18°F (10°C) below the shutdown threshold andthe Operator presses the WARNING RESET button. This safety shutdown will not occur when theWinding Temperature Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen. Also,it will not act on any RTD input registering as an open RTD or any individual winding temperaturesensor that has been disabled with the Temperature Disable Setpoint on the MOTOR SETPOINTSScreen.


Motor – High Bearing TemperatureThis safety shutdown occurs when either of the enabled motor bearing temperatures exceeds theprogrammed High Bearing Temperature Shutdown threshold for 3 continuous seconds. The valueprogrammed for this safety threshold is displayed as High Bearing Temperature Shutdown on theMOTOR SETPOINTS Screen. It is programmed with the Bearing Setup Setpoint on that screen. Thechiller can be started after both bearing temperatures decrease to at least 9°F below the shutdownthreshold and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button. This safety shutdown will notoccur when the Bearing Temperature Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled on the MOTOR DETAILSScreen. Also, it will not act on any RTD input registering as an open RTD.

Motor – High Bearing VibrationEither the Shaft End or Opposite Shaft End motor bearing vibration has exceeded the valueprogrammed for the High Vibration Shutdown Setpoint for the programmed number of delayseconds. This safety shutdown does not occur when the Motor Vibration Protection Setpoint is setto Disabled on the MOTOR DETAILS Screen or while the WARNING – MOTOR – BEARING VIBRATIONBASELINE NOT SET warning is displayed. The chiller can be started after both vibration valuesdecrease below the shutdown threshold and Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Motor – Cooling Coil LeakThe Motor Cooling Coil Leak Detector has registered a fault condition for at least 3 continuousseconds. The Motor Cooling Coil leak Protection Setpoint enables the type of sensor employed: Ifan optical sensor is being used, the input to the Motor Monitoring Board goes high to indicate aleak; if a float switch is used, the input goes low to indicate a leak. This safety shutdown will notoccur when the Motor Cooling Coil Leak Protection Setpoint is set to Disabled. The chiller can bestarted after the leak sensor no longer indicates a leak and the Operator presses the WARNINGRESET button.

Mod “B” SSS safety shutdown messagesLCSSS Shutdown – Requesting Fault DataThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has shut down the chiller but the ControlCenter has not yet received the cause of the fault from the LCSSS, via the serial communicationslink. The LCSSS shuts down the chiller by opening the Motor Controller LCSSS Stop Contacts (K1relay located on the Logic/Trigger Board and connected between TB6-16 and TB6-53 in the ControlCenter). The Microboard, in the Control Center, then sends a request for the cause of the faultto the Logic/Trigger Board over the serial communications link. Since serial communications areinitiated every 2 seconds, this message is typically displayed for a few seconds and then replacedwith one of the following fault messages.

LCSSS – High Instantaneous CurrentThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board detected that the compressor motorcurrent in any phase exceeded 1.1(1.414 x RMS value of the programmed Start Current) for aminimum of 1 second. The chiller can be started after the Operator presses the WARNING RESETbutton.

LCSSS – High Phase (X) Heatsink Temperature – RunningThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected the temperature of phaseA, B or C (designed as X in the message) Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) Modules has exceeded212°F while the chiller was running. The safety can be reset after all SCR temperatures are less than210°F and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button. However, the chiller cannot be started


until all SCR temperatures are less than 109°F. During the shutdown, the starter cooling pump runsuntil the temperature is less than 109°F.

LCSSS – 105% Motor Current OverloadThe highest phase of the compressor motor current increased to greater than 105% of theprogrammed 100% chiller Full Load Amps continuously for 40 seconds. The chiller can be startedafter the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

LCSSS – Phase (X) Shorted SCRA shorted Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) in phase A, B or C (designated as X in the message) hasbeen detected by the Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board. The voltage across eachSCR in monitored to detect the shorted condition. The shorted condition must exist continuouslyfor 5 seconds in order to annunciate the fault. This check is disabled while the chiller is running.The chiller can be started after the condition has been corrected and the Operator presses theWARNING RESET button.

LCSSS – Open SCRAn open Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) has been detected by the Liquid Cooled Solid StateStarter Logic/Trigger Board. The open condition must exist continuously for 5 seconds in orderto annunciate the fault. The chiller can be started after the condition has been corrected and theOperator presses the WARNING RESET button. This check is disabled when the chiller is shut down.In certain applications, local power line conditions could interfere with the open SCR detectiontechnique. This requires a qualified Service Technician to disable this check. Refer to OptiViewControl Center – Service Instructions (Form 160.54-M1).

LCSSS – Phase (X) Open SCRAn open SCR in phase A, B or C (designated as X in message) has been detected. This safetyshutdown has the same criteria as LCSSS – OPEN SCR above, however, the phase in which the openSCR occurred is identified.

LCSSS – Phase RotationThe Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter Logic/Trigger Board has detected the three phase compressormotor power line voltage phase rotation is not correct. The chiller can be started after the phaserotation is correct and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Compressor motor VSD safety shutdown messagesThe following safety shutdown messages are displayed on Compressor Motor Variable SpeedDrive (VSD) applications only. These messages are generated by events that occur within theVSD. The chiller can be started after manual resets are performed as detailed below. Service andtroubleshooting information is contained in Variable Speed Drive – Service Instructions (Form 160.00-M1).VSD Shutdown – Requesting Fault DataThe VSD has shut down the chiller and the Control Center has not yet received the cause of thefault from the VSD, via the serial communications link. The VSD shuts down the chiller by openingthe Motor Controller VSD Stop Contacts (located on the VSD Logic Board and connected betweenTB6-16 and TB6-53 in the Control Center). The Microboard in the Control Center then sends arequest for the cause of the fault to the VSD Logic Board via the Adaptive Capacity Control Board,over the serial link. Since serial communications are initiated every 2 seconds, this message istypically displayed for a few seconds and then replaced with one of the following fault messages.


VSD – 105% Motor Current OverloadThis shutdown is generated by the VSD Logic Board and it indicates that a motor overload hasoccurred. The shutdown is generated when the VSD Logic Board has detected that at least 1 of the3 output phase currents has exceeded 105% of the chiller Full Load Amps (FLA) value for greaterthan 7 seconds. The chiller FLA value is set by adjustment of the FLA potentiometer on the VSDLogic Board. The chiller can be started after the RESET push-button on the VSD Logic Board ispressed and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – High Phase A Inverter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)

This shutdown will occur if the heatsink temperature exceeds 158°F on any of the output poleassemblies. This shutdown will seldom occur. In most cases where the coolant temperature hasrisen abnormally, the VSD will shut down on Ambient Temperature @ 140.0°F before the heatsinkscan reach 158°F. If this message is displayed, make sure there is adequate coolant level, ascertainthe pump is operating when the chiller is running, and check the strainer in the primary of the heatexchanger for clogs and silt. The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears, the RESETbutton on the VSD Logic Board is pressed and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – High Phase B Inverter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)

See PHASE A message above.

VSD – High Phase C Inverter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)


VSD – High Converter Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)


VSD – High Converter Heatsink Temperature(Applicable to VSD with Part Number 371-02767-XXX (60 Hz) and 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz))

This shutdown will occur if the heatsink temperature exceeds 170°F. The chiller can be started afterthe fault condition clears and the Compressor Switch is placed in the Stop-Reset (O) position.

VSD – High Inverter Baseplate Temperature(Applicable to VSD with Part Number 371-02767-XXX (60 Hz) and 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz))

This shutdown will occur if the baseplate temperature exceeds 175°F. The chiller can be startedafter the fault condition clears, the RESET button on the VSD Logic Board is pressed and theOperator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – High Phase A Inverter Baseplate Temperature(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60 Hz; 419HP 50 Hz)

The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has increased to greater than 158°F.The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears, the RESET button on the VSD Logic Boardand Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – High Phase B Inverter Baseplate Temperature(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60 Hz; 419HP 50 Hz)


The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has increased to greater than 158°F.The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears, the RESET button on the VSD Logic Boardand the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – High Phase C Inverter Baseplate Temperature(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60 Hz; 419HP 50 Hz)

The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has increased to greater than 158°F.The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears, the RESET button on the VSD Logic Boardand the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – Precharge LockoutIf the VSD fails to make pre-charge, the relay will drop out for ten seconds while the VSD fans andwater pumps remain energized and the pre-charge resistors cool down. After this, the VSD willattempt to initiate pre-charge again.

If the VSD fails to make pre-charge after 3 consecutive attempts, the unit will shut down, lockout,and display this message: The chiller can be started after the Operator presses the WARNING RESETbutton.

Harmonic Filter – High Heatsink Temperature(Style D VSD)

The Harmonic Filter power assembly has one heatsink transmitter on the 503 HP units, and twoheatsink transmitter on the 790 HP units. If the temperature on any heatsink exceeds 167°F, theunit will shut down. This message is usually an indication of a low coolant level in the VSD coolingloop. The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears, the OVERTEMP RESET button on theFilter Logic Board is pressed and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Harmonic Filter – High Baseplate Temperature(Applicable to VSD with part number 371-02767-XXX (60 Hz) and 371-03700-XXX (50 Hz))

This shutdown occurs when the baseplate temperature exceeds 174°F (79°C). The chiller can bestarted after the fault condition clears, the OVERTEMP RESET button on the Filter Logic Board ispressed and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

Harmonic Filter – High Baseplate Temperature(VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP 60 Hz; 419HP 50 Hz)

The chiller has shutdown because the baseplate temperature has increased to greater than 194°F.The chiller can be started after the fault condition clears, the OVERTEMP RESET button on the FilterLogic Board is pressed and the Operator presses the WARNING RESET button.

VSD – Harmonic Filter-High Baseplate Temperature(575V/60 Hz applications)

If the baseplate temperature rises above the following limits, this shutdown is performed:

424HP - 70.0°F, 174.2°C

608HP - 88.0°F, 190.4°C

Harmonic Filter – High Total Demand DistortionThis shutdown indicates the filter is not operating correctly and the input current to the VSD/Filteris not sinusoidal. This shutdown will occur if the TDD exceeds 25% continuously for 45 seconds.TDD is an acronym for Total Demand Distortion, a term defined by the IEEE Std 519-2014 standardas the total root-sum-square harmonic current distortion, in percent of the maximum demandload current (15 or 30 min demand). In the filter option supplied by YORK, the displayed TDD is


the total RMS value of all the harmonic current supplied by the main power to the VSD divided bythe chiller Full Load Amps, in percent. A standard VSD, less the optional filter typically has an inputcurrent TDD level on the order of 28-30%. The chiller can be started after the Operator presses theWARNING RESET button.

VSD – Low Frequency DetectedAfter a 20 second bypass after entering System Run, if the VSD frequency decreases to below 1 Hzless than the minimum allowed frequency for 25 continuous seconds, this shutdown is initiated.The minimum allowed frequency for the VSD is 25 Hz for 50 Hz units; 30 Hz for 60 Hz units. TheOperator must press the WARNING RESET button to reset the fault.


PrintingFigure 69: Printer

Printing overviewA printer can be connected to the Control Center’s Microboard to print the following reports. Thescreen from which each report can be generated is listed in parenthesis.

• Status - Present system parameters (Printer, Home)• Setpoints - Present programmed values of all setpoints (Printer, Setpoints)• Schedule - Present value of programmed daily schedule (Printer, Schedule)• Sales Order - Information about SALES ORDER Screen (Printer, Sales Order)• History - System parameters at the time of the last normal stop, last fault while running and

last 10 faults, whether running or not (Printer, History)• Cycling or Safety Shutdown Initiated Print - Snapshot of all system parameters at instant

of shutdown. Automatically occurs if printer is connected at time of shutdown.• Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) Surge Map - System conditions at instant all surge points

were mapped. (Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive applications; Access Level Required:SERVICE level) (Printer, ACC)

• Trend - Prints a snapshot of the existing TREND Screen data or prints new data collected afterthe TREND PRINT key is pressed.

The printer can be permanently connected to the Control Center or connected as required toproduce a report. If permanently connected, a DATA LOGGING feature can produce a status reportautomatically, beginning at an Operator selected start time and occurring at an Operator selectedinterval thereafter.The following figures are examples of the different print reports. Solid State Starter applicationprint reports shown. Electro-Mechanical Starter and Variable Speed Drive reports are similar butprint parameters applicable to those devices.

• Figure 72: Status• Figure 74: Setpoints• Figure 76: Schedule


• Figure 77: Sales order• Figure 79: History• Figure 81: Security log• Figure 82: Trend• Figure 83: Custom screen• Figure 84: ACC New map points report• Figure 85: ACC Existing map points report

Acceptable printersThe following printers can be used. Printers must be equipped with an RS- 232 Serial interface.

Okidata

Models: OKIPOS 441

• Dimensions: 6.9 in. wide x 9.64 in. deep x 5.98 in. high• Paper: 3.0 in. wide• Type: Dot Matrix Impact• Purchase: 800-OKIDATA Spare printer Ribbon Okidata 52119001 Black

The Control Center provides the required formatting control codes for the printers above when theprinter is selected on the PRINTER Screen in the instructions below. These codes are transmittedthrough the serial interface to the printer to provide a proper print format.Different printers require different formatting control codes. Other printers might provide properoperation when connected to the Control Center. However, the print format may not be correct oras desired.Proceed with caution and use the following guidelines if an unlisted printer is selected:

1. All must be capable of RS-232 serial communications.2. Primary differences between printers involve the formatting control codes required by

the printer. These codes are sent from the Control Center to the printer. For example,Weigh-Tronix printers require a control code to select 40 column width. This same codeis interpreted by the Okidata printer as an instruction to print wide characters. In someinstances, a printer will ignore a code it cannot interpret.

3. The Control Center requires a busy signal from the printer when the printer receive bufferis full. This causes the Control Center to momentarily terminate data transmission until theprinter can accept more data. The busy signal polarity must be asserted low when busy.


Printer connectionsConnect the printers to the Control Center Microboard as follows. Only one printer can beconnected at a time.Table 206: Okidata OKIPOS 441

Microboard Printer FunctionJ2-4 Pin 3 Tx (data to printer)J2-2 Pin 20 DSR (busy signal from printer)J2-9 Pin 7 Gnd

Cabinet – Shield

Hardware required:Cable

• #18 AWG stranded 50 ft. maximum length.

ConnectorsMicroboard

• None. Strip 1/4" insulation from wire and insert into screw terminal block.

Printers

• Okidata - 25 pin plug DB-25P or equivalent; Shell DB-C2-J9 or equivalent.

Printer setupThe selected printer must be configured as follows. Refer to manual provided by printermanufacturer with respective printer.

Okidata OKIPOS 4411. With the printer power off, remove the two screws which hold the RS232 Interface Module.2. Pull the RS232 Interface Module out of the printer.3. Set DIP switch SW2-2 to OFF to select 19200 BPS. Do not change any other switch settings.4. Re-install the RS232 Interface Module and two mounting screws.5. Load paper and install the printer ribbon into the printer.6. Connect the printer cable to the printer and the microboard.7. Connect the printer power cable to the printer and plug into a 100 to 240VAC power source.

Control center setupChiller IDAccess Level Required: OPERATORUsing the COMMS Screen, assign an identification number to the chiller. This number will appear atthe top of each report.

Printer setupAccess Level Required: OPERATOR


Using the COMMS Screen, the Control Center must be configured to transmit data in the sameformat as the printer is configured to receive the data. The following values must be entered.

• Baud Rate - Set to 19200• Data Bits - 8• Parity - None• Stop Bits - 1

Printer typeAccess Level Required: OPERATORUsing the PRINTER Screen, set the printer type to Weigh-Tronix.

Automatic data loggingAccess Level Required: OPERATORIf automatic data logging is desired, a status report can be automatically printed at a specifiedinterval beginning at a specified time, using the PRINTER Screen. The interval is programmableover the range of 1 minute to 1440 minutes in 1 minute increments. The first print will occur atthe programmed START time and occur at the programmed Output Interval thereafter. The timeremaining until the next print is displayed on the PRINTER Screen.

• Automatic Printer Logging - Enables and disables automatic data logging.• Log Start Time - Enter the time the first print is desired.• Output Interval - Enter the desired interval between prints.

Downloading system prints to a laptopAbout this task:Downloading system histories to a file is another useful method to capture system operatingconditions. The following instructions are used to establish communication between the OptiViewControl Panel and a laptop computer.

1. Connect the laptop computer to the OptiView as described below.

Table 207: Laptop and OptiView connectivityLaptop (RS-232 Serial Port) OptiView (Com 1)

Pin Desc Connector Terminal2 RX to J2 4 (TXD1)4 DTR to J2 2 (DSR1)5 GND to J2 9 GND

2. On OptiView Printer Screen, select “PC”. This will allow faster data download than the printerselections. SETTINGS should match “h. Port settings” see below. Earlier software select SEIKOif PC selection is not available.

3. Setup HyperTerminal:

a. Go to START menub. Select All Programs


c. Select Accessoriesd. Select Communicationse. Select HyperTerminalf. In the box displayed, it requires a name and icon for the connection. Select a name that is

descriptive and select an icon. Select OK.g. In the box labeled Connect using the select com port that will connect to the YK-EP unit.

This port is usually labelled Com 1. Select OK.h. Port settings:

Bits persecond 57600

Data bits 8

Parity None

Stop Bits 1

Flow control None

4. Set HyperTerminal to capture a file:

a. Select Transfer from toolbarb. Select Capture Text from the drop down menu.c. A Capture Text Filebox will be displayed. Verify location and file name.d. Select Start.

5. Press the Print Screen key on the appropriate screen to be captured. The HyperTerminal willdisplay the printed information and the information will be recorded as a .txt file.

ResultWhen the print file has been recorded, select Transfer from the toolbar and capture from the dropdown menu and select Stop. This will stop the transfer and allow access to the capture file.The following additional RS232 connections, are used to wire up serial devices for desktop andlaptop computers.

RS-232 pin assignments (DB25 PC signal set)

(Older desktops only)Pin 1 Protective GroundPin 2 Transmit DataPin 3 Received DataPin 4 Request To SendPin 5 Clear To SendPin 6 Data Set ReadyPin 7 Signal Ground

Pin 8 Received line Signal Detector(Data Carrier Detect)

Pin 20 Data Terminal ReadyPin 22 Ring Indicator

The connector on the PC has Male pins, therefore the mating cable needs to terminate in a DB25/F(Female pin) connector.


RS-232 pin assignments (DB9 PC signal set)

(Most laptops)

Pin 1 Received line Signal Detector(Data Carrier Detect)

Pin 2 Recieved DataPin 3 Transmit DataPin 4 Data Terminal ReadyPin 5 Signal GroundPin 6 Data Set ReadyPin 7 Request To SendPin 8 Clear To SendPin 9 Ring Indicator

The connector on the PC has male pins; therefore, the mating cable needs to terminate DB9/F(female pin) connector.

Brecknell – Brecknell CP130• Dimensions: 5.25″ Long x 3.75″ Wide x 2.5″ High• Paper: Thermal 57mm (2.25”)• Type: Dot Matrix• Purchase: 800-637-0529 (North America) +44 (0) 845-246-6717 (Europe and ME)• P/N AWT 05-505788 (printer, cable, 1 roll of paper)• P/N AWT 05-505594 (power supply)• P/N AWT 05-505671 (case, 20 rolls of paper)

Printer connectionsConnect the printer to the Control Center Microboard as follows. Only one printer can be connectedat a time.Table 208: Brecknell CP130

Modify the cable and connect as shown belowMicroboard Printer Function

J2-4 Pin 3 TX Data to the printerJ2-2 Pin 5 Busy signal from the printerJ2-9 Pin 6 Signal Common


Figure 70: Breckman printer

Figure 71: Communications block diagram

MICRO

OPTIVIEW

RTX1

G

PC HYPERTERMINAL

E-LINK

COM 1

RS-232

TX

DB9

25

4

Port 2BRXTX

COM

GND

DSR

GTXGRXCOM 4B

J2942

J276

LD14492


Figure 72: Sample printout of Status


Figure 73: Sample printout of Status (cont.)


Figure 74: Sample printout of Setpoints


Figure 75: Sample printout of Setpoints (cont.)


Figure 76: Sample printout of Schedule


Figure 77: Sample printout of a Sales order


Figure 78: Sample printout of a Sales order (cont.)


Figure 79: Sample printout of History


Figure 80: Sample printout of History (cont.)


Figure 81: Sample printout of a security log report


Figure 82: Sample printout of trend data new or existing points

Figure 83: Sample printout of a custom screen report


Figure 84: Sample printout of an Adaptive Capacity Control new map point report

Figure 85: Sample printout of an Adaptive Capacity Control existing map points report


ServiceOptiView control panelThe YK-EP chiller OptiView Control Panel is very similar to the YK chiller. Therefore the belowinformation highlights the critical information and differences. Refer to the YK service manual forcommon components not explained in this section of the YK-EP manual.

Microboard 031-03630-007Microboard 031-03630-007 is supplied in new production YK-EP chillers starting in August of 2016.Although this board uses a different microprocessor and supporting components, the chillercontrol and operator interface are the same as the previous 031-02430-007 Microboards. It uses thesame mounting hole pattern and has the same interface connectors as the previous boards exceptfor the improved power supply connections and the VSOP cable uses a removable screw terminalplug.It is backward compatible to existing YK-EP chillers with 02430 microboards and is supplied asservice replacement 331-02430-615-615 which contains the new 03630 microboard, power supplyharness and an SD card with the program to be loaded in to the microboard. When replacing anexisting 031-03630-007 microboard, service kit 331-03630-615 provides a new board and an SD cardwith the latest version program.The new 031-03630-007 microboard consists of a base board with a small daughter board mountedon the base board. This daughter board is the SMARC processor board. The two boards are matedin the factory and cannot be replaced separately.All of the connectors for the sensors, communication ports display and keypad have the sameconnector designations. The jumpers related to the display and thermal flow switches remain thesame and should be set to the same positions as the existing 02430 microboard. The SW1 DIPswitch settings should be set the same as the SW1 switch positions on the 02430. Position SW1-4 onthe 03630 is now used in place of JP6 on the 02430 to initiate a program update.On the 02430 a BRAM chip stored the configurable setpoints, sales data and Real Time Clock. TheBRAM chip has been replaced with FeRAM and a separate battery backed up Real Time Clock tomaintain the time during power outages. The RTC Battery is a CR2032 button cell Lithium batterywhich can last over 10 years and is readily available at local stores.The board is supplied with +12VDC (J1-5), -12VDC (J1-6), +5VDC (J1-1 and J1-2), +24VDC (J1-7) andground (J1-3 and J1-4) from the Power Supply (Refer to Figure 89). The +5VDC (fused by F1) canbe monitored at TP12 and TP3. It is used by the microboard circuits and applied to a +3.3VDCregulator. The outputs of this regulator is applied to Microboard circuits.The +12VDC (fused by F2) can be monitored at TP5 and TP4 in reference to TP1 GND. It is appliedto a +5VDC regulator and the output of the regulator is the +5VDC (Analog) supply that powers allanalog circuits and is the source voltage for all of the transducers and thermistors. The +5VA can bemonitored at TP10 referenced to TP1 GND.

Test points and LED indicatorsThe primary power supplies have LEDs to indicate the presence of power. The voltages can bemeasured at the following test points in reference to TP1 or TP11.


Table 209: Test points and LED indicatorsVoltage Test point Voltage range Fuse LED+5VDC TP3 +4.92 to +5.28VDC F1 (5A) CR56

+12VDC TP4 +11.58 to +12.5VDC F2 (5A) CR57-12VDC TP33 -11.5 to -12.5VDC F3 (5A) CR58+24VDC TP35 +22.4 to +26.7VDC F4 (4A) CR59+3.3VDC TP2 +3.25 to +3.43VDC n/a CR62

VCC TP15 +4.92 to +5.28VDC n/a n/a+5VA TP10 +4.95 to +5.05 n/a CR61

Battery n/a +2.95 to +3.45 n/a n/a

Boot-up programThe Boot-up Program is stored in Flash memory. It may be updated along with a new version of theoperating program by inserting an SD card containing the new program into the SD card slot on the03630 board, setting DIP Switch SW1 position 4 to ON and then applying power to the chiller. TheBoot-up Program version is displayed on the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in SERVICE access level.Table 210: Diagnostic display codesLED display code(normal boot up) Description

00 DIP 4 OFF - Booting from internal Flash programCH Flash Checksum Test in progressAP Application program setup in progress∞ Application program is running

LED display code (other)

01 DIP 4 ON - Booting from SD card [Normal when loading aprogram]

02 DIP 4 ON - Booting from USB port05 DIP 4 ON - PIC application is being configured

F0 DIP 4 OFF - Boot from internal Flash Failed [Try to reload theprogram]

F1 DIP 4 ON - Boot from SD card Failed [Bad SD card or Badmicroboard]

F3 DIP 4 ON - Microboard Internal error [Bad microboard]

F4 DIP 4 ON - Checksum Failed [Try to reload program, Badmicroboard]

FF DIP 4 ON - Boot from SD card Failed

Note:

If the display stops at a 01 display, this may be an indication that the SD card reader isdefective.

If the display stops at the YORK logo with a white screen, this indicates that the board has noprogram to boot from.


When power is first applied to the OptiView™ Control Center, a white screen is displayed while theboot-up is performed. During the boot-up, the Boot-up program in the Flash Memory configuresthe microprocessor and related components and performs testing of certain components to assurethose components are operational.The sequence of events in the boot-up process are listed in the Table 210. The progress and pass/fail status of each step is displayed on the microboard 7-segment LED Display (U25 and U26). Dueto the speed at which the boot-up proceeds, not all steps will be visible during the process. Not allpass/fail status is displayed on the white screen.

Chiller operating programThe Chiller Operating Program is a set of instructions to control the chiller. It contains the Safetyand Cycling shutdown thresholds (non-changeable) and display screen messages and graphics.The chiller operating program is stored in non-removable Flash Memory that is soldered to themicroboard. New chillers are supplied programmed with the latest program available at the time ofmanufacture. The program version that is currently residing in the microboard Flash Memory Chipis displayed on the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in SERVICE access level.

Program CardThe on-board program can be upgraded by downloading the latest program version from aprogram card. This is a SD format card which is 1-5/16" X 1". It is a portable Flash memory storagedevice that is programmed with the chiller operating program. The program card part number forYK-EP chillers is 031-03616-001 and is available from the BaltimoreParts Distribution Center (PDC). There is a Program card for each chiller type (YT, YK, YS, YR, YD, etc)and each has a unique part number. A label affixed to the Program card contains the part numberand version. The version is an alpha-numeric code that identifies the chiller model applicability,language package, language package revision level and chiller operating program revision level.The Program card is applicable to both NEMA and CE applications. The Program card for YK chillershas English language support.The program version that is currently residing in the microboard Flash Memory Chip is displayed asthe “Controls” Software Version on the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in SERVICE access level.The Program card obtained from the PDC is programmed with the latest version of the chilleroperating program. Program cards can be reprogrammed.A Program card for a particular chiller type can be used to re-program other chillers of the sametype. For example, it is not necessary to have more than one YK-EP Program card. A single YK-EPcard can be carried to different locations to re-program other YK-EP OptiView™ Control Centers.A Write Protect Switch on the edge of the Program card prevents inadvertent writing to the Cardduring program downloading.Handling precautions for the Program card include:

• Do not allow dirt or water to enter the connector• Operating temperature range for Commercial grade SD cards is -25°C to 85°C (-13°F to 185°F)

A label on the Program card contains the version and JCI part number. The version is analphanumeric code that identifies the chiller model applicability, language package, languagerevision level and chiller control revision level. The version is as follows:


Program Download Connector J26The SD Program card is inserted into connector J26 to download a program. Refer to instructionsunder Service Replacement.

FeRAMThe FeRAM (Ferroelectric Ramdom Access Memory) preserves the stored data during powerfailures. All of the programmed Setpoints, Sales Order Data and History Data is stored here. Thismemory does not require a battery.

Real Time ClockThe RTC (Real Time Clock) uses a common CR2032 button-cell lithium battery to maintain the timeand date during power outages. The battery life is over 10 years. This type of battery is used inwatches and is readily available at drug stores and appliance stores.

SMARC ModuleThe SMARC Module is the processor card for the 031-03630-007 microboard. The SMARC Moduleand the baseboard are assembled as a pair in the board manufacturing factory and can not beswapped in the field. SMARC (Smart Mobility ARChitecture) is a relatively new standard to enablemultiple vendors to provide high performance embedded processor cards. This will allow usingfuture processors if the current ones become obsolete without having to re-design the microboard.

Watchdog CircuitThe Watchdog circuit performs two functions as follows:

• Power failure detection• Program latch-up detection/prevention

The Watchdog Circuit monitors the +5VDC from the power supply and the +3.3VDC from theonboard regulator to determine when a power failure is occurring. If the +5VDC decreases tothe threshold of (+4.44VDC to +4.68VDC) or the +3.3VDC decreases to the threshold of (+2.84VDCto +3.04VDC), a reset is issued to the microprocessor and the chiller shuts down. When power isrestored, the white screen is displayed and the boot-up is performed as described above. When thegraphic screen is displayed, the message CONTROL PANEL – POWER FAILURE is displayed.The Watchdog Circuit also assures that the entire program is being executed and that the programhas not latched-up, bypassing important safety checks. The Watchdog circuit is a timer that times-out if not given a reset pulse within its time-out period (1 to 1.204 seconds).


To prevent a time-out, the microprocessor sends a reset pulse to the Watchdog circuit everytime the complete program has been executed. Since it takes less than 1 second to performthe entire program, the Watchdog circuit doesn’t time-out under normal operation. However,if the entire program is not executed or something prevents the microprocessor from sendingthe reset pulse as described below, the Watchdog circuit times-out and sends a reset to themicroprocessor, initiating a re-boot. If running, the chiller shuts down. The display momentarilyblanks and the white screen is displayed while the boot-up program executes as described above.When the graphic screen is displayed, either of two messages is displayed depending on the type ofWatchdog shutdown as explained below.There are two different watchdog initiated shutdowns; a HARDWARE watchdog initiated shutdownand a SOFTWARE watchdog initiated shutdown.In the HARDWARE watchdog initiated shutdown, a program problem, on-board noise or hardwareproblem could prevent the watchdog time-out. If this occurs, a re-boot is initiated and when thegraphic screen is displayed, CONTROL PANEL – POWER FAILURE is displayed.In the SOFTWARE watchdog initiated shutdown, the program intentionally initiates the rebootbecause it has detected program interruption. After the reboot, WATCHDOG – SOFTWARE REBOOTis displayed on the graphic screen.

Program jumpers/Program switchesThe Program Jumpers and Program Switches are used to alter the program operation or configurethe microboard hardware for specific operation. This allows the Program and Microboard tobe universal for all standard applications. The position of some jumpers can be determined bythe Service technician to meet the desired operation. Others must be positioned according tothe requirements of the size, type or style of components and thus are determined by the YORKfactory. The jumpers are plastic sleeves with metal inserts that are inserted over 2-prong or 3-prongconductors. The Program Switches are miniature switches that are placed in either the ON or OFFposition.

Program jumpersNote: When replacing a 02430 microboard with a 03630, use the same jumper positions for thejumpers marked with an *

JP2*Display power and logic levels Determines the power supply voltage applied to the display.

• Pins 1-2: +5VDC SHARP LQ10D367, LQ10D368 displays.• Pins 2-3: +3.3VDC SHARP LQ104V1DG61, LQ104V1DG81 and LG Semicon LP104V2W displays.

JP3*Display backlight enable signal level polarity. Jumper must be positioned according to the voltagelevel required to turn on the Display Backlight.

• Pins 1-2: 0VDC – not used.• Pins 2-3: +12VDC or +5VDC as determined by position of JP4. SHARP LQ10D367 LQ10D368,

SHARP LQ104V1DG61, LQ104V1DG81 and LG Semicon LP104V2W displays.

JP4*Display Backlight enable signal logic levels. Determines the logic levels of the Backlight Enablesignal.

• Pins 1-2: +12/0VDC – SHARP LQ104V1DG81.


• Pins 2-3: +5VDC/0VDC SHARP LQ10D367, LQ10D368, LQ104V1DG61 and LG Semicon LP104V2-W displays.

JP5*Display Backlight power. Determines the power supply voltage applied to the Display BacklightInverter Board.

• Pins 1-2: +12VDC. SHARP LQ10D367, LQ10D368, LQ104V1DG61, LQ104V1DG81 and LGSemicon LP104V2-W displays.

• Pins 2-3: +5VDC. Not used.

JP7*, JP8*Display brightness control technique. Determines whether the display brightness is controlled by avariable resistance or a variable voltage.

• IN: Variable voltage (0 to 5.0VDC). SHARP LQ10D367, LQ10D368, LQ104V1DG61, LQ104V1DG81and LG Semicon LP104V2W displays.

• OUT: Variable resistance – not used.

JP10*Factory mounted thermal flow sensor – evaporator connected to J14.

• Pins 1-2: Not used.• Pins 2-3: Place shunt in this position

JP11*Factory mountedthermal flow sensor – condenser connected to J14


JP12*Not used


JP12*Not used


JP14Applies a 120 Ohm terminating resistor across the COM3 RS-485 port.

• IN: Not used.• OUT: Normal position - no bias applied.


JP15Applies a pull-up voltage to the COM3 + terminal.


JP16Applies a pull-down voltage to the COM2 - terminal.



• IN: Not used.• OUT: Normal position - no termination applied.

JP18Applies a 120 Ohm terminating resistor




JP20Applies a pull-down voltage to the COM3 - terminal.


JP21*Shunt must be removed or hang on one pin

• Pins 1-2: Not used• Pins 2-3: Not used

JP22*Shunt must be removed or hang on one pin

• Pins 1-2: Not used.• Pins 2-3: Not used.


JP23*Remote Current Limit setpoint (J22) type.Configures Analog Input for 0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to20mA or 4 to 20mA.

• OUT: Allows 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input on J22-1.• Pins 1-2: Allows a 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA input on J22-2.• Pins 2-3: Not used.

JP24*Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint (J22) type. Configures Analog Input for 0 to10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA.

• OUT: Allows 0 to 10VDC or 2 to 10VDC input on J22-3.• Pins 1-2: Allows a 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA input on J22-4.• Pins 2-3: Not used.

JP25*DC Undervoltage signal for Proximity Probe.

• Pins 1-2: Correct position for YKEP• Pins 2-3: Not Used

JP26Applies a pull-down voltage to COM6 RS-485 - termnal.

• Pins 1-2: Not used.• Pins 2-3: Normal position - no bias applied.

JP27Applies a pull-down voltage to the COM5B - terminal.


JP28Applies a 120 Ohm terminating resistor across the COM5B RS-485 port.

• IN: Not Used.• OUT: Normal position - no bias applied.

JP29Applies a pull-up voltage to the COM5B + terminal.



Program switchesSW1-1*Refrigerant Selection. Must be set according to the refrigerant type installed in the chiller.

• ON – R-134a• OFF – R22

SW1-2*Liquid Type. Must be set according to whether the chiller is cooling water or brine solution.

• ON – Brine.• OFF – Water.

SW1-3*Diagnostics. Enables or Disables the software diagnostics.

• ON – Enables diagnostics. Disables normal chiller operation.• OFF – Disables diagnostics. Enables normal chiller operation.

SW1-4Boot from SD Card/Flash (This performs the same function as the JP6 jumper on the 02430 board.

• ON – Enables boot from SD card to load a new program.• OFF – Boot the program stored in memory.

Keypad interfaceThe keypad is read via J18. The keypad is a matrix of conductors arranged in rows and columns(Refer to Form 160.54-M1). There are 4 rows and 8 columns. When a key is pressed, the conductorsare pressed together at that point, creating continuity between the row conductor and the columnconductor. The keypad is read by applying a logic low to a row while leaving +5VDC pull-up on allother rows. The microprocessor then reads the 8 columns. If any column has a logic low on it, thekey corresponding to that coordinate (row, column) is being pressed. The microprocessor readsthe entire keypad by repeating this routine beginning with row 1 and ending with row 4. The entirekeypad is continually read while the Control Center is powered.

CM-2 board or Style A Solid State Starter interfaceThe microboard retrieves certain operating parameters (via J10) from the compressor motor startercontrol board (CM-2 Current Board for Electro-Mechanical Starter or Style A Solid State Starter LogicBoard). Refer to Form 160.54-M1 for a detailed explanation of each board. Both boards contain an 8channel multiplexer. The microprocessor sequentially and continually reads channels 0 through 7.It reads each channel by applying a 3-bit binary address to the multiplexer.A 0 to 5VDC analog value is re-turned from each channel. The function of each is shown in Table211.The microprocessor determines which board, and therefore which starter is present, by the valuereturned from channel 0. Since channels 0 through 6 are grounded, the CM-2 board returns a0VDC value. The Solid State Starter Logic Board returns a value greater than 0.41VDC to +5VDC. Ifthe value is less than 0.4VDC, it indicates the starter is an Electro-mechanical (EM) starter and themicroprocessor then reads channel 7 to retrieve the peak motor current value. A value greater than


0.4VDC indicates the starter is an A style Solid State Starter and the microprocessor reads channels1 through 7.In the Solid State Starter, channel 0 indicates the starter size (model) and voltmeter range (300VACor 600VAC). Channel 1 is a hardware generated 100% FLA (prevents pre-rotation vanes from furtheropening) or 104% FLA (closes pre-rotation vanes until motor current is less than 102%) currentlimit override command that overrides normal Pro-rotation Vanes control. Channels 2 through 4are analog voltages that represent phase A, B and C motor current. The highest phase is Channels5 through 7 are analog voltages that represent phase A, B and C Line Voltage. The data for eachchannel is shown on the below.Table 211: Multiplexer channels

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CM-2 GND GND GND GND GND GND GNDPeak Motor

Current(%FLA)

Style A SSSStarter model/

voltmeterrange

Current limitcommand

Phase Cmotor

current

Phase Bmotor

current

Phase Amotor

current

Phase Aline voltage

Phase Bline voltage

Phase Cline voltage

Style B SSS interfaceStyle B Solid State Starters produced before June 2008 can communicate with the 031-03630-007Microboard via the Opto-coupled COM5 serial data port (J15) using YORK proprietary protocol. Theserial data is represented by +5VDC and 0VDC logic levels. TX data to the starter is at J15-1. RX datafrom the starter is at J15-2.Style B Solid State Starters produced after mid 2008, communicate with the 031-03630-007Microboard via the COM 2 serial port (J13) using RS-485 Modbus protocol. The COM 2 Modbuscommunications may use the fiber optic interface for better noise immunity and elimination ofpotential ground loop problems when the Solid State Stater is equipped with the compatible 02505Logic/Trigger control board.When SSS-Mod B is selected as the motor drive type on the SETUP Screen, additional setpoints mustbe entered on the screen. The appropriate serial port (COM 2-Modbus or COM 5 YORK) must beenabled using the Motor Communications Protocol setpoint. The selections are Modbus or “YORK”.When Modbus is selected, the Motor Node ID setpoint must be set to match the setting of theStarter Logic/Trigger Board Modbus Address Switch SW1. They must be both be set to “1”.

Variable Speed Drive interfaceVariable Speed Drives produced before March 2007 communicate with Microboard 031-03630-007via the Opto-coupled COM5 serial data port (J15) using the YORK proprietary protocol. The serialdata is represented by +5VDC and 0VDC logic levels. TX data to the starter is at J15-1. RX data fromthe starter is at J15-2.Variable Speed Drives built after March 2007 communicate with Microboard 031-03630-007 via theCOM2 serial data port (J13) using RS-485 or fiber optic Modbus protocol.With Microboard 031-03630-007 when “VSD-60Hz” or “VSD-50Hz” is selected on the SETUP Screenas the Motor Drive Type, additional setpoints must be entered on this Screen. The appropriateserial port (COM2-Modbus or COM5-YORK) must be enabled using the Motor CommunicationsProtocol setpoint. The selections are Modbus or “York”. When Modbus is selected, the Motor NodeID setpoint must be set to match the setting of the VSD Logic Board Modbus Address Switch SW3.They must be both set to “1”.There are two different types of Modbus protocol used. Modbus ASCII for Mod D/Vyper andModbus RTU for Raptyr. When VSD – 60Hz or 50Hz is selected for the Motor Drive Type setpoint onthe SETPOINTS Screen, the microboard will poll on COM 2 alternating between the two protocolsuntil one of them responds or until an initialization fault occurs. Once a valid response is received


from either VSD type, the microboard will “remember” this, even after a power failure. This allowsthe correct screens to be displayed after a power failure, without repeating the poll interrogationas long as the Motor Drive Type is not changed. Once the microboard determines which VSD type isconnected, it will not poll for the other.

Medium Voltage Solid State Starter (MV SSS) and Medium Voltage VariableSpeed Drive interface (MV VSD)These drives communicate with the microboard via the COM2 RS-485 Modbus serial port (J13).Refer to Medium Voltage Solid State Starter – Service (Form 160.00-M5) and Medium Voltage VariableSpeed Drive – Service (Form 160.00-M6) for details of this interface. When the MV SSS or MV VSD isselected on the SETUP Screen, the COM2 serial port with Modbus protocol is automatically enabled.With the MV VSD, the Adaptive capacity Control functionality is contained on the microboard.

Printer interfaceAn optional printer can be connected to COM1 RS-232 serial data port (J2). TX data to the printeris at J2-4. The DSR (Data Set Ready or busy) signal from the printer is at J2-2. Signal levels arestandard RS-232. The microboard sends data to the printer at the selected baud rate until theprinter buffer becomes full, where-upon the printer asserts its Busy signal. The microboardsuspends data transmission until the printer can accept more data. Each printer must be setup/configured to operate properly with the microboard. The Baud, Data Bits, Parity and Stop Bits mustbe programmed on the COMMS Screen. Other printer setup is performed on the Printer Screen.

SC-EQ communications interface cardAn optional SC-EQ communication card can be connected to the COM 4B RS-232 serial data port(J2). TX data to the SC-EQ is at J2-7. RX data from the SC-EQ is at J2-6. Signal levels are standardRS-232. The SC-EQ polls system pressures, temperatures and status from the microboard. It holdsit for retrieval by third-party devices. Refer to SC-EQ Installation Instructions (Form 450.50-N1) fordetails on the SC-EQ (Smart Chiller - Equipment) communications card.

Digital inputsThe I/O Board converts the 115VAC inputs to logic level inputs for the microboard at J19. A 115VACinput to the I/O Board is converted to a logic low (less than 1VDC). A 0VAC input to the I/O Board isconverted to a logic high (greater than 4VDC). Refer to Form 160.54-M1 for more details on the I/Oboard.

Digital outputsThe microboard controls 115VAC relays and solenoids via the I/O Board (via J19). The I/O Boardcontains +12VDC relays that isolate the microboard low voltage circuits from the 115VAC devicecoils. Solid state switching devices are used to control the relays. The microboard energizes the+12VDC relays by applying a ground to the coil input. They are de-energized by opening the groundpath. The contacts of these relays switch 115VAC to system relays and solenoids. The outputs thatcontrol the chilled liquid pump and compressor motor starter have anti-chatter (anti-recycle) timersassociated with them. The output that controls relay K0 is not allowed to change at a rate greaterthan once every 10 seconds. The output that controls relay K13 is not allowed to change at a rategreater than once every 20 seconds.The microboard controls actuator motors via Triacs on the I/O Board. Each actuator has an openwinding and a close winding. Current flowing through a winding causes the actuator to rotatein the respective direction. Each winding is controlled by a Triac. The Triac is turned ON to allowcurrent to flow through a winding. The microboard turns on the Triac by applying a logic low (lessthan 1VDC) to the Triac driver on the I/O Board. It turns it OFF by applying a logic high (greaterthan 4VDC).


Analog inputsSystem pressures, in the form of analog DC voltages, are input from Pressure Transducers. Referto Form 160.54-M1 for more details. Formulas and graphs are included to calculate the expectedtransducer output voltage for a given pressure input.System temperatures, in the form of analog DC voltages, are input from thermistors. Refer to Form160.54-M1 for more details. Included are tables to convert the expected output voltage for anytemperature applied to the thermistor.

Flow switchThe chillers are supplied with factory-mounted Flow Sensors on the evaporator and condenser.These are electronic thermal-type sensors. The operating principle of the sensor is thermalconductivity. It uses the cooling effect of a flowing liquid to sense flow. The temperature of theheated sensor tip is sensed by a thermistor located in the tip. A second thermistor, located higherin the tip in a non-heated area, is only affected by changes in liquid temperature. The temperaturessensed by the thermistors are compared. Flowing liquid carries heat away from the heated sensortip, lowering its temperature. The higher the flow rate, the lower the tip temperature and thereforea lower differential between thermistors. Lower flow rates remove less heat from the tip allowinga higher tip temperature. The lower the flow, the greater the differential between thermistors. Thesensor is vendor-calibrated to turn ON its output at a flow rate of 20cm (0.6 ft.)/second.The sensor operates from a 24VAC power source and has a solid state relay output. On each sensor,one side of the solid state relay (pin 4) is connected to +5VDC on the microboard and the otherside (pin 2) is connected to an Analog Input of the microboard (Refer to Form 160.54-M1 for moredetails). After power is applied, there is a thermal warm-up period of up to 20 seconds. During thistime, the output could be unstable. When the setpoint (or greater) flow rate is sensed, the solidstate relay output is turned ON causing it to conduct current through the 7.5K ohm Microboardload resistor to the +5VDC. This applies greater than +4VDC to the microboard input. When a flowrate less than the setpoint is sensed, the solid state relay output is turned OFF, resulting in noconduction through the load resistor. This applies less than 1VDC to the microboard input. Todetermine the state of the solid state relay, first confirm that +5VDC is present at pin 2 of the flowsensor. Then connect a voltmeter between the microboard TP1 (GND) and the respective flowsensor input to the microboard.The software accommodates either the Paddle type sensors connected to TB4 of the I/O Board orthe Thermal type sensors connected to J14 on the microboard. To assure the program reads thecorrect input, the Flow Switch setpoint on the OPERATIONS Screen must be set appropriately .

Serial data portsMicroboard 031-03630-007 is equipped with 6 serial ports. Each port is dedicated for a specificfunction as follows:

1. COM1 (J2) – RS-232. Printer.2. COM2 (J13) – RS-485. Modbus communications to the Primary Liquid Cooled Solid State

Starter, Medium Voltage Solid State Starter, Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drive or VariableSpeed Drive.

3. COM3 (J12) – RS-485. LTC I/O and Motor Monitoring.4. COM4 (J2) – RS-232. SC-EQ communication card.5. COM5B (TB4) – RS-485. Future VGD actuator.6. COM6 J29 & J30 Fiber Optic cable to LCSSS.

Each port is equipped with two LED’s. A red TX LED illuminates as data is transmitted to orrequested from another device. A green RX LED illuminates as data is received from another device.


The RS-232 voltages are industry standard +5 to +25VDC and -5VDC to -25VDC logic levels. TheRS-485 voltages are industry standard 0VDC and +1.5VDC to +5VDC logic levels.A diagnostic test can be performed on each serial port to confirm proper operation. Refer toDiagnostics Section of Form 160.54-M1 for details.The LED’s and their functions are as follows:

• CR41 RX1 – COM1 serial port receive data.• CR42 TX1 – COM1 serial port transmit data.• CR40 RX2 – COM2 serial port receive data.• CR37 TX2 – COM2 serial port transmit data.• CR38 RX3 – COM3 serial port receive data.• CR35 TX3 – COM3 serial port transmit data.• CR39 RX4 – COM4 serial port receive data.• CR36 TX4 – COM4 serial port transmit data.• CR44 RX5B – COM5B serial port receive data.• CR43 TX5B – COM5B serial port transmit data.• CR48 RX6 – COM6 serial port receive data.• CR46 TX3 – COM6 serial port transmit data.

Display interfaceThe graphic screens displayed on the Liquid Crystal Display are created from the programdownloaded from the Program card and stored in the Flash Memory Chip. The data to form thesescreens is output from J5. This data is in the form of red, green and blue drive signals appliedto each of the 303,200 display pixels arranged in a matrix of 640 columns x 480 rows. Each pixelconsists of 3 windows; red, green and blue, through which a variable amount of light from theDisplay Backlight, is permitted to pass to the front of the display. The drive signals determine theamount of light permitted to pass through each window. The overall pixel color is a result of thegradient of red, green and blue light allowed to pass. The drive signal for each pixel is an 18 bitbinary word; 6 for each of the 3 colors. The greater the binary value, the more light is permitted topass. The pixels are driven sequentially from left to right, beginning with the top row. To coordinatethe drive signals and assure the pixels in each row are driven from left to right and the columns aredriven from top to bottom, the drive signals are accompanied by a clock and horizontal and verticalsync signals.During the boot-up, the program in the FeRAM reads wire jumpers PID0 through PID3 on theDisplay Interface Board to determine the manufacturer of the display. Each display manufacturerrequires a slightly different control. The program in the BIOS EPROM configures the microboard forcorrect operation for the actual display installed.Different display manufacturers require different supply and control voltages for their displaysand backlights. Program Jumpers JP2 through JP5 and JP7 and JP8 must be configured to providethe required supply and control voltages to the display and backlight control. A label attached tothe display mounting plate lists the required program jumper configuration for that display. Theposition of program jumper JP2 determines whether the supply voltage is +5VDC or +3.3VDC.The microboard controls the Display Backlight via J6. The Display Backlight is the light sourcefor the display. The Backlight Inverter Board (FL Backlight Displays) provides a high voltage ACpower source for the lamp. It converts low voltage DC via J6-1 (+12VDC or +5VDC, dependingon position of Program Jumper JP5) to high voltage AC (500 to 1500VAC). This high voltage AC isapplied to the lamp to cause it to illuminate. The Backlight is turned ON and OFF with the “BacklightEnable” signal (J6-5). The position of Program Jumper JP4 determines whether this is a +12VDC or


+5VDC signal. In some displays, the backlight turns ON when this signal transitions from low tohigh; others turn OFF when it transitions from high to low. The position of Program Jumper JP3determines the transition that will occur when the microboard outputs the Backlight Enable signal.JP3 must be positioned according to the display manufacturer’s requirement.The microboard controls the backlight brightness via the Lamp Dimmer circuit output at J6-7.In order to extend the life of fluorescent Backlight lamps, the brightness is driven to 50% after10 minutes of Keypad inactivity. At this brightness level, the graphics are still visible. WhenKeypad activity is detected (a key is pressed), the lamp is driven back to full (100%) brightness.Some display manufacturers require a variable voltage to vary the brightness; others require avariable resistance. Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 must be configured to enable the appropriatetechnique. The Lamp Dimmer is an integrated circuit that is the electrical equivalent of a 10Kohm potentiometer with 100 positions or steps. The Lamp Dimmer controls the position of thepotentiometer. The Lamp Dimmer varies the brightness of the backlight by applying a variablevoltage (0 to 5.0VDC) or a variable resistance (0 to 10K ohms) to the Backlight Inverter Board (Ifapplicable). If Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are installed, the Lamp Dimmer output is a variablevoltage; if both are removed, the output is a variable resistance. The Lamp Dimmer outputs“Brightness Control Wiper” (J6-7) to the Backlight Inverter Board. If configured for variable voltageoutput, the voltage between J6-7 and J6-8 can be varied from 0VDC (100% brightness) to 5.0VDC (0%brightness). If configured for variable resistance, the resistance between J6-6 and J6-7 varies from 0ohms (0% brightness) to 10K ohms (100% brightness).

Remote setpointsRemote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature and Current Limit setpoints can be input via the RS-232SC-EQ communications interface at J2 or directly to the microboard at J22 using a hardwired analogsignal. The inputs at J22 are configured with Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24 to accept these inputsin either 0 to 10VDC, 2 to 10VDC, 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA form.

Configuration/SetupThe following functions are entered as setpoints on the SETUP Screen.Chilled Liquid Pump Operation – Determines Chilled Liquid Pump control contacts (I/O BoardTB2- 44/45) operation when chiller shuts down on cycling shutdowns. Selections are:

1. Standard – Contacts open at completion of System Coastdown after all shutdowns exceptLEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE. On this shutdown, they remain closed,causing the pump to continue to run while the chiller is shutdown.

2. Enhanced – Contacts open at completion of System Coastdown after all shutdowns exceptLEAVING CHILLED LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE, MULTI-UNIT CYCLING – CONTACTS OPENand SYSTEM CYCLING – CONTACTS OPEN. On these shutdowns, they remain closed, causingthe pumps to continue to run while the chiller is shutdown.

Motor Drive Type – Configures the program for the applicable Primary compressor motor drivetype. Selections are:

1. EM – Electromechanical Starter2. SSS-Mod A – Style A Solid State Starter3. SSS-Mod B – Style B Solid State Starter4. VSD-60Hz – Variable Speed Drive, 60Hz5. VSD-50Hz – Variable Speed Drive, 50Hz6. MVVSD – Medium Voltage VSD7. MVSSS – Medium Voltage Solid State Starter


Anti-recycle – Enables or Disables the Anti-recycle timer. Selections are:

1. Enabled – Enables the anti-recycle timer. Solid State Starters and electromechanical starterapplications cannot be started at intervals shorter than once every 30 minutes. VSDapplications can be started at the completion of System Coastdown up to 5 times. On the 5thshutdown, a 10-minute timer is started and restart is inhibited until the timer has elapsed.

2. Disabled – Disables the anti-recycle timer. Chiller can be started at the completion of SystemCoastdown, regardless of how long the chiller had been running.

CAUTION

The Anti-recycle timer must never be disabled unless advised by YORK factory.

Power Failure Restart – Determines the course of action required to restart the chiller, if a powerfailure occurs while the chiller is running. Selections are:

1. Manual – Requires a manual reset after power is restored. The chiller cannot be started untilthe operator moves the keypad Start-Run-Stop/Reset rocker switch to the stop/reset position.

2. Auto – Chiller will automatically restart when power is restored.

Coastdown – Determines the “Coastdown” duration (oil pump run duration after shutdown) andwhether the “Motor Controller – Loss of Current” check and anti-recycle function is performedwhile the chiller is running. Selections are:

1. Standard – Electric motor applications. When STANDARD is selected, the Coastdown Timesetpoint appears. This setpoint is used to set the duration over the range of 240 (default)to 900 seconds or 150 (default) to 900 seconds as determined by the selection made for theChiller Style/Compressor setpoint (on the OPERATIONS Screen).

2. Enhanced – “Coastdown” is 15 minutes in duration. “Motor Controller - Loss of Current” checkand anti-recycle function is not performed since there is no motor current.

Pre-run – Determines the duration of the “System Pre-lube” period. Selections are:

1. Standard – “System Pre-lube” is 50 seconds in duration.2. Extended – “System Pre-lube” is 180 seconds in duration.

Oil Pump Package – Configures the program for either Variable Speed Drive Oil Pump or FixedSpeed Oil Pump. Chillers equipped with the Variable Speed Drive Oil Pump have a Programcontrolled Oil Heater and a different complement of solenoid valves than chillers equipped with aFixed Speed Oil Pump. A description of the two Oil Pumps is as follows:

1. Variable Speed – configures the program to operate the Variable Speed Drive Oil Pump, theOil Heater (maintains oil temperature 50°F above condenser saturation temperature) and theOil Return and Liquid Line (J compressors only) solenoid valves are connected in parallel toTB1-61.

2. Fixed Speed – Configures the program to operate the fixed speed Oil Pump and the followingsolenoid valves:

- TB1-61 Oil Return and Liquid Line connected in parallel


Motor Communications Protocol (VSD applications (VSD and Style B LCSSS applications)Only displayed when Motor Drive Type setpoint above is selected as “VSD-60Hz”, “VSD-50Hz” or“SSS-Mod B”. Allows the Service technician to enable the appropriate serial communications portfor communications with the Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter (LCSSS) or Variable SpeedDrive (VSD). Early vintage Style B LCSSS and VSD communicate with the microboard using YORKprotocol (COM 5 (J15)). Later vintage units use Modbus protocol (COM 2 (J13)).The protocol selection enables the appropriate communications port:

• YORK enables COM 5 A(J15)• Modbus enables COM 2 (J13)

Selection required is based on the hardware and interface that is present. The chiller must bestopped with the START-RUN-STOP/RESET switch in the STOP/RESET position to change thissetpoint. A description of the two protocols is as follows:

1. YORK – Enables COM 5 (J15) serial port. On Variable Speed Drive applications, used whenthe microboard is interfaced to the VSD via the ACC Board. On Style B Liquid Cooled SolidState Starter applications, used when the microboard is interfaced to the LCSSS Logic/TriggerBoard TB2.

2. Modbus – Enables COM 2 (J13) serial port.

- VSD Applications – Used when the ACC Board is not present and the microboard isinterfaced directly to VSD Logic Board 031- 02506 (J16).

- Style B Solid State Starter Applications – Used when the microboard is interfaced tothe LCSSS Logic/Trigger Board 031-02505 (J14).

Motor Node ID (VSD and Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter applications).Only displayed when Modbus is selected for the Motor Communications Protocol setpoint. Allowsthe Service technician to enter the Modbus Address of the VSD logic board or Style B LCSSS Logic/Trigger Board. The Motor Node ID setpoint must match the Modbus Address assigned to theseboards. Whenever the microboard is reading or writing to these devices, it transmits the addressentered as the Motor Node ID setpoint. The device will only respond if the transmitted addressmatches the address assigned to the device. The chiller must be stopped to change this setpoint.

• VSD Applications – Enter 1 for the Motor Node ID setpoint. Then set the Modbus Addressof VSD Logic Board 031-02506 to “1” by setting Switch SW3 position 1 to ON with all otherpositions OFF.

• Style B Solid State Starter Applications – Enter 1 for the Motor Node ID setpoint. Then set theMod-bus Address of the Logic/Trigger Board 031-02505 to 1 by setting Switch SW1 Position 1to ON with all other positions OFF.

Coastdown Time – Only appears when STANDARD is selected for the Coastdown setpoint. Sets theduration of the coastdown period. The time is programmable over the range of 240 (default) to 900seconds or 150 (default) to 900 seconds as determined by the selection made for the Chiller Style/Compressor setpoint on the OPERATIONS Screen. Refer to the Chiller Style/Compressor setpoint.Condenser Temperature Range – Special order chillers that operate at higher than standardcondenser temperatures require higher condenser high pressure warning and safety thresholds.This setpoint allows the software to be used in either standard or high temperature applications.


This setpoint is set at the factory at time of manufacture and requires an ADMIN password tochange it. It is only visible when set to Extended. The selections are:

1. Standard – Uses standard high pressure warning and safety shutdown thresholds as follows:

- Warning – High Pressure Limit – Maximum allowable value is 162.5 PSIG- Condenser – High Pressure – Trip/reset threshold is 180/120 PSIG- Condenser – High Pressure – Stopped – Trip/reset threshold 160 PSIG.

2. Extended – Uses higher high pressure warning and safety shutdown thresholds as follows:

- Warning – High Pressure Limit – Maximum allowable value is 193.0 PSIG- Condenser – High Pressure – Trip/reset threshold is 200/140 PSIG- Condenser – High Pressure – Stopped – Trip/reset threshold is 170 PSIG

PRV Position New production chillers can be equipped with an optional Pre-rotation Vanespotentiometer, regardless of other options. This setpoint allows the software to be used in all YK-EP chillers, whether equipped with the potentiometer or not. The PRV position will be shown onrespective screens when Enabled; not shown when Disabled.

1. Enabled – Automatically set to this setting if Hot gas bypass or Variable Geometry Diffuser(VGD) is enabled on the OPERATIONS Screen or Motor Drive Type setpoint is set to VSD orMVVSD. The actual connection point of the potentiometer is determined by the equipmentconfiguration:

- If equipped with a VSD in YORK Protocol configuration, it is connected to the ACCBoard.

- In Modbus Protocol configuration, it is connected to the microboard J7.If not equipped with a VSD, but equipped with Hot gas bypass, the connectionpoint is determined by which I/O Board is present. With I/O Board 371-02514-000or 031-02895-000, it is connected to this board; otherwise, it is connected to themicroboard J7. If not equipped with Hot gas bypass but equipped with a VGD, it isconnected to the microboard J7.

2. Disabled – Set to this position when not equipped with a PRV potentiometer. If equipped witha VSD, MVVSD or the Hot gas bypass or Variable Geometry Diffuser is enabled, this setpoint isautomatically enabled and cannot be set to disabled.

- Motor MonitoringThe Motor Monitoring feature to be enabled or disabled. Motor Monitoring can not beused with the 371-02514-000 since the Motor Monitoring and the Frick Analog boarduse different protocols.

- Heat RecoveryAllows the Heat Recovery feature to be enabled or disabled.

- Head Pressure ControlAllows the Head Pressure feature to be enabled or disabled.


Microboard service replacementAbout this task:If the microboard is replaced within the warranty period, the defective board must be returned toJCI YORK per the warranty return procedure. Use the return instructions and return address labelprovided with the replacement board.To order a replacement Microboard for a YK-EP Chiller, order part number 331-03630-615. Thispart number provides an 031-03630-007 Microboard and an SD program card with the latest YK-EPprogram. This SD (031-03605-002) card must be loaded in to the microboard.

1. Record the setpoints and configuration settings and print the Setpoints and Sales Orderreports.

2. Retrieve the sales order data using the YMSO utility program.3. Shut down the chiller and then power off the unit following all JCI Safety Requirements.4. Remove all of the wiring harness plugs from the old microboard and label any loose

communication wires that are currently connected to J2, J13 or J12.5. Loosen the ground screw that holds the power supply harness green ground wire and

remove the power supply harness.6. Remove the 10 microboard mounting screws and remove the old microboard.7. Set the Jumpers JP2 through JP12 and JP21 through JP25 and SW1 switch on the 03630 to the

same positions as those on the 02430 board. A description of these jumpers are found later inthis document.

8. Install the new 03630 microboard using the screws previously removed.9. Connect the power supply harness P2 to J2 on the power supply with the green and yellow

ground wire oriented closest to the front of the panel. Attach the ground lug under theground screw. (If replacing a 02430).

10. Connect power supply harness P30 to J30 on the panel wiring harness, J32 to P32 on the panelwiring harness, P1 to J2 on the 03630 and P3 to J3 on the 03630.

11. The VSOP J20 3 pin plug has been replaced by a removable screw terminal plug. The wireswill need to be cut from the 02430 P20 plug. Strip the 3 wires 1/8” and insert them in the new03630 J20 plug. Note that pin 1 on the 03630 board is opposite of where it was on the 02430board. It is now on the left side of J20. Connect the White wire to terminal 1 of J20, the Red toterminal 2 and the Black to terminal 3.

12. If an ACC board is installed, the wires on the 02430 P15 plug will also need to be cut andstripped and inserted into the 03630 J15 COM5A removable screw terminal plug. Connect theRed wire to terminal 1, the White wire to terminal 2 and the Black wire to terminal 3.

13. If an ACC is not installed then if the starter is a VSD, MVVSD or MVSSS with Modbuscommunication, connect the Green wire to J13-2 (-), the White wire to J13-3 (+) and the Blackwire to J13-4 (Gnd).

14. If an E-Link is installed, connect the wires to 03630 J2. Connect the Red to terminal 6 GRX,Black to terminal 6 GTX.

15. If Expansion LTC I/O or a Motor Monitoring board is installed, connect the communicationCOM3 to the 03630 COM3 J12 Red wire to terminal 5 + and the Black wire to terminal 4 -.

16. Connect all of the remaining plugs to their appropriate connections on the microboard. Allplugs are marked the same designation on the 03630 as they are on the 01730 and 02430.

17. Power up the panel with the rocker switch in the OFF position.18. Enter the Sales Order data either manually or using the YMSO utility program then enter the

setpoint and configuration data.


Program card service replacementSince one YK-EP SD Program card can be used to reprogram other YK-EP chillers, it is not necessaryfor an individual Service technician to have more than one YK Program card. Program cards can beshared among Service technicians where appropriate.However, since chiller operating programs are occasionally revised, the Service technician couldhave a Program card that does not contain the latest program. Program cards (031-03601-002) forYK-EP chillers are available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center (PDC). The card receivedfrom the PDC is programmed with the latest version of the chiller operating program. Programcards can be re-programmed with the latest program version.


Downloading a program from a program cardAbout this task:

CAUTION

There are 3 steps to the re-programming process: Erase, Program and Veriflcation. Once the re-programming process is initiated, it automatically proceeds through these steps to completion. Itcannot be manually terminated before completion. Therefore, once the process is initiated, the existingon-board program will be erased and replaced by the program in the Program card.

Before proceeding, be absolutely certain the Program card is applicable to your chiller model. Forexample, if your chiller is a YK-EP chiller, the Program card used MUST be for a YK-EP chiller. If a YSchiller program is down-loaded into a YK-EP chiller, for example, the chiller will be rendered inoperableuntil this procedure is repeated using the correct Program card!

A label affixed to the Program card contains the card version. The version is an alpha-numeric codethat identifies the chiller model applicability, language package and program revision level. Theversion is as follows:

Figure 86: Card version nomenclature

Download the program as follows:

1. Remove power to OptiView™ Control Center.2. Reposition Microboard DIP switch SW1 position 4 to ON.3. Insert Program card into Microboard connector J26.4. Restore power to OptiView™ Control Center. A white screen appears displaying “Flash Check-

sum Test” and the microboard 7-segment LEDs (U25 and U26) displays “Ch”. While this isdisplayed, the microboard is performing a checksum test on the Program card. This assuresthe integrity of the card before the download procedure can begin. If the checksum test fails,the card is defective or corrupted and the download procedure cannot be performed. If thechecksum test passes, the OptiView™ Flash PROGRAMMER Screen is displayed.

5. Press START key to start the downloading process. A dialog box appears asking if youwant to “Erase Onboard Flash and Re-Program from Pc Card‑”. Do not proceed until youunderstand the above caution!

6. Use the ► key to scroll to YES.


7. Press the Enter key. The following steps will be performed:

a. Erasing - During this procedure, the program in the microboard Flash Memory will beerased. A green bar reflects the progress of this procedure. The red LED next to this barilluminates while this procedure is in progress.

b. Programming - During this procedure, the program in the Program card is downloadedinto the microboard Flash memory. A green bar reflects the progress of this procedure.The red LED next to this bar illuminates while this procedure is in progress.

c. Verifying - During this procedure, a checksum test is performed on the new program inthe microboard Flash Memory. A green bar reflects the progress of this procedure. Thered LED next to this bar illuminates while this procedure is in progress.

The microboard 7-segment LED Displays (U25 and U26) display the steps of theprogramming process while they are in effect. During the Erasing procedure, “Er”displayed. During the Programming procedure, “Pr” is displayed. During the Verifyingprocedure, “Ch” is displayed.At the completion of the re-programming process, if it is successful, “Flash Has BeenSuccessfully Programmed” is displayed and “Operation Successful” is displayed in theStatus Code box. Otherwise, a message in the status box indicates the step that failed.

8. Remove power from OptiView™ Control Center.9. Remove Program card from Microboard connector J26 by lightly pushing the SD card in and

then releasing pressure. The SD card should pop out slightly allowing for removal.10. Reposition Microboard DIP Switch SW1 position 4 to OFF.11. Apply power to the OptiView™ Control Center.

Result The re-programming procedure is now complete.


Figure 87: Microboard 031-03630-007

Figure 88: Program card 031-03601-002


Figure 89: Microboard (031-03630-007 DC power supply test points

LD22058

+5.0V Load to Switch Baseboard


Table 212: Power supply test points

Voltage Test point Voltagerange Fuse LED

+5VDC TP3 +4.92 to+5.28VDC F1 (5A) CR56

+12VDC TP4 +11.58 to+12.5VDC F2 (5A) CR57

-12VDC TP33 -11.5 to-12.5VDC F3 (5A) CR58

+24VDC TP35 +22.4 to+26.7VDC F4 (4A) CR59

+3.3VDC TP2 +3.25 to+3.43VDC n/a CR62

VCC TP15 +4.92 to+5.28VDC n/a n/a

+5VA TP10 +4.95 to +5.05 n/a CR61Battery n/a +2.95 to +3.45 n/a n/a

Figure 90: Microboard lamp dimmer circuit

6

7

8

J6

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (+) OR (N.C.)

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (WIPER)

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (-)

TO BACKLIGHTINVERTER

BOARD

JP8

JP7

5.0 VDC

10 K

LD22054

Note:

1. J6-6 not connected (N.C.) to Backlight Inverter Board when display is manufactured bySharp or NEC.

2. The position of Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 determine the output at J6-7; In = VariableVoltage; Out = Variable Resistance. Refer to Program Jumper Listing for applications.

3. Potentiometer is actually an integrated circuit that is the electrical equivalent of a 10KΩpotentiometer.


Figure 91: Microboard serial data communication ports

MICRO

UART

COM 1

COM 4B

RS-232PRINTER

4352

7618

J2TXRX

DTRDSR

GTXGRX

TX1 RX1

CR42 CR41R G

CR36 CR39R G

TX4 RX4

COM 3RS-485

COM 5 RS-232

OPTO-COUPLE

123456

1 2 3 4 5 6

J12

J15TXRX

COMMON

+24VDC+12VDC-12VDC

-+

GND

TX3 RX3

TX5 RX5

CR15 CR38R G

CR35R G

CR43 CR44R G

YORK PROTOCOL-

STYLE B LCSSS

VSD ADAPTIVE CAPACITYCONTROL BOARD OR

HOT GAS BYPASSHEAT RECOVERYHEAD PRESSURE CONTROLMOTOR MONITORING

LTC I/O BOARD

SC-EQ Communication Card

RS-485COM 2 1

234

J13+12V

TX2 RX2

CR37 CR40R G

GND

(-)

(+)MODBUS PROTOCOL- MV VSD, MV SSS, VSD,STYLE B LCSSS

PRIMARY MOTOR CONTROLLER

RS-485COM 6 1

234

TB2+12V

TX6 RX6

CR46 CR48R G

GND

(-)

(+) MODBUS PROTOCOLSTYLE B LCSSS

ECONOMIZER MTR CONTROLLER

LD22061

GND


Figure 92: Configurable analog and remote setpoint inputs

FACTORY MOUNTED EVAPORATORTHERMAL-TYPE FLOW SENSOR (style F and later chillers) (note 2)

REMOTE CURRENTLIMIT SETPOINT

REMOTE LEAVINGCHILLED LIQUIDTEMP SETPOINT

REMOTE SETPOINTGND CONNECTIONS

24 VAC

0-10 VDC /2-10 VDC

0-20 mA /4-20 mA

5

4

3

1

2

16

4

142

4

2

13

15

13

MUX

47K

JP21

JP22

JP23

JP24

2007.5 K

12

3

12

3

12

3

12

3

71.5 K

+5V

3

17+5V

J7

J22

0-10 VDC /2-10 VDC

0-20 mA /4-20 mA

FACTORY MOUNTED CONDENSERTHERMAL-TYPE FLOW SENSOR (style F and later chillers) (note 2)

24 VAC

2

4

13

LD22055

Note:

1. Program Jumpers JP23 – JP24 must be positioned on pins 1-2 or 2-3 according to inputsignal type. (Voltage OUT, Current 1-2, 2-3 Not Used)

2. On new production chillers prior to June 2009, the Thermal type flow sensors areconnected to Microboard J7 as shown above. Program Jumpers JP21 and JP22 must be onpins 2-3. On new production chillers after June 2009, the Thermal type flow sensors areconnected to Microboard J14 (Refer to Figure 94).

3. Factory mounted evaporator Thermal type flow sensor (new production chillers prior toJune 2009) or Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Thermistor (chillers equipped with theoptional Heat Pump Duty feature)


Figure 93: Configurable analog and remote setpoint inputs (heat pump duty)

REMOTE CURRENTLIMIT SETPOINT

REMOTE LEAVINGCHILLED LIQUIDTEMP SETPOINT

REMOTE SETPOINTGND CONNECTIONS

0-10 VDC /2-10 VDC

0-20 mA /4-20 mA

5

4

3

1

2

16

4

14

2

13

15

MUX

47K

JP21

JP22

JP23

JP24

2007.5 K

12

3

12

3

12

3

12

3

71.5 K

+5V

3

17+5V

J7

J22

0-10 VDC /2-10 VDC

0-20 mA /4-20 mA

LEAVING CHILLEDLIQUID TEMPRERATURE

THERMISTOR

LD22056

Note:

1. Program Jumper JP21 must be positioned on pins 2-3. (Thermal type Evaporator flowsensor for chillers produced before June 2009 and Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperaturesensor for Heat Pump Duty chillers.)


Figure 94: Low voltage digital inputs

24VAC

Factory Mounted EvaporatorThermal-Type Flow Sensor

(note 1)3

2

4

2

4

2

4

1

24VAC

Factory Mounted CondenserThermal-Type Flow Sensor

(note 1)3 1

24VAC

Factory Mounted Heating Condenser

Thermal-Type Flow Sensor (note 1)3 1

Not Used

LD22057


Note:

1. On new production chillers after June 2009, the Thermal type flow sensors are connectedto Microboard J14 as shown above. Program Jumpers JP10 through JP12 must bepositioned on pins 2-3 and software version C.OPT.01.21.307 (and later) is required. Onnew production chillers prior to June 2009, the Thermal type flow sensors are connectedto Microboard J7 (Refer to Figure 92).


Metric conversion

The following factors can be used to convert from English to the most common SI Metric values.Table 213: SI metric conversion

Measurement Multiply English unit By factor To obtain metric unitCapacity Tons refrigerant effect (ton) 3.516 Kilowatts (kW)Power Horsepower 0.7457 Kilowatts (kW)

Flow rate Gallons / Minute (GPM) 0.0631 Liters / Second (l/s)Feet (ft) 0.3048 Meters (m)

LengthInches (in.) 25.4 Millimeters (mm)

Weight Pounds (lbs) 0.4536 Kilograms (kg)Velocity Feet / Second (fps) 0.3048 Meters / Second (m/s)

Feet of Water (ft) 2.989 Kilopascals (kPa)Pressure drop

Pounds / Square inch (psi) 6.895 Kilopascals (kPa)

TemperatureTo convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius (°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or0.5556.Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 7.22°CTo convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10°F) from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or0.5556.Example: 10.0°F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range

© 2020 Johnson Controls. 5000 Renaissance Drive, New Freedom, York, PA 17349, USA. Subject to change without notice. Allrights reserved./

yk-ep style b centrifugal chiller - johnson controls

Documents